JP6539202B2 - Game console - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

  In pachinko and other game machines, the game area of the game board is provided with an obstacle that changes in the direction of the falling of the game balls, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. It is common. When the game ball wins a prize, a bonus is given to the player such as paying out a prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 etc.).

  In addition, in such gaming machines, those equipped with display means are known.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game console characterized by display means.

The game console of the present invention which solves the above object is
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays ;
Holding display means,
A game console equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of the number corresponding to the number for which the start of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold"),
One of the display types is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the number displayed.
In the period from when the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, a plurality of the notices The display of an icon (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be started,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon display suggestion display,
The preview icon display suggestion display is a display that suggests that the display of the preview icon may be started.
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by display means.

It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, (c) shows the decorative symbol An example is shown and (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure pre-reading process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for 1st drawing and 2nd drawing. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for yes-no decision. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for special figure determination. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part main processing, (b) is the 1st sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, (d) is a flowchart of 1st sub control part image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 2nd sub control part main processing, (b) is the 2nd sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part timer interruption processing. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows sequentially the example of an effect shown in FIG. 14 in steps. It is a figure which shows gradually an example of the production | presentation of another case following FIG.15 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining the example of a display of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorized by RAM408, (c) is a notice icon It is a figure explaining an example of digestion timing, and (d) is a figure explaining an example of the increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of a notice icon before change, (b) is a figure explaining an example of a notice icon after change. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in succession the example of an effect shown in FIG. 19 in steps. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 step by step. It is a figure which shows in succession the example of an effect shown in FIG. 21 in steps. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 22 in stages. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in succession the example of an effect shown in FIG. 31 in steps. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 32 step by step. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 33 step by step. It is a figure which shows in succession the example of an effect shown in FIG. 34 in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in which a notice icon changes gradually. It is a figure showing the example of a display at the time of power failure and power recovery while displaying a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of notice icon increase presentation and a digestion presentation in steps. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 41 in stages. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of notice icon increase presentation and a digestion presentation in steps. It is a figure showing the modification of the increase production of a notice icon which can be applied to this embodiment, and a digestive presentation in steps. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 46 in stages. It is a figure which shows in steps the other modification of the increase production | presentation of a prior art icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestive presentation. It is a figure which shows in steps the other modification of the increase production | presentation of a prior art icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestive presentation. It is a figure showing in a step-by-step manner another modified example of the digestion presentation effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other modification of the increase production | presentation of a prior art icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestive presentation. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of a production using movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of notice icon increase presentation gradually. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of notice icon increase presentation gradually. It is a figure showing gradually another modification of the increase production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of notice icon increase presentation gradually. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of notice icon increase presentation and a digestion presentation in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the other modification of the increase production | presentation of a prior art icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestive presentation. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect which can be performed in decoration symbol display device 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining a lottery table related to a notice item. It is a figure showing gradually the example of presentation of the notice icon increase presentation and the digestion presentation which can be applied to this embodiment. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 62 in stages. It is a figure showing gradually the example of presentation of the notice icon increase presentation and the digestion presentation which can be applied to this embodiment. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 64 in stages. It is a figure showing in order the other production example of the notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing in order the other production example of the notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing in order the other production example of the notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing in order the other production example of the notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of another presentation concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure showing in order the other production example of the notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing in order the other production example of the notice icon increase production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relation between a notice icon and tutorial display.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 1. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console which allows the player to earn a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the outer frame 102, the main body 104, the front frame door 106, the door 108 with a ball storage tray, The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102 and having a locking function and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk in a store (game arcade) where the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 is provided for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge 112 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable, and is configured in a frame shape to be inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the game arcade can open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, the one in which the light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of opening and closing with a locking function. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pushing an unillustrated opening lever which can be operated in a state where the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, you may provide the door with a ball storage plate which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate was opened. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board Embedded in the game play area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 A chance button lamp 138 for emitting a button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and an instruction for returning a player's balance to the card unit And a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower bowl full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full by the game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. While the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player, the launch device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every lapse of a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of a launcher. In addition, it may be provided with a right-handed button which can maximize the emission intensity by being depressed in a state where the ball emission handle 134 is operated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 positioned on the right side in a rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device for giving a driving force to the gaming ball and transporting the gaming ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant Based on the establishment of the condition, the game value (game ball) of an amount according to the provision condition is awarded (payout) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub substrate case 162 for storing a first sub substrate 160 constituting a first sub control unit 400 (refer to FIG. 4) which performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 The second sub substrate case 166 for housing the second sub substrate 164 that constitutes the second sub control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls 4) and a release board case 172 for storing a release board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk; A launch substrate case 176 for housing a launch substrate 174 constituting a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power control unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric gaming devices A power supply substrate case 184 housing a power supply substrate 182 having a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at power on. And, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In the following, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "common figure", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a seven-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in the form of enhanced effect, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally called common drawing fluctuation games to be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of common drawing fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second change games (special game change games to be described later in detail) being held. In the mode, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure for a special figure variation game). The term "pending" as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (lottery process etc.) based on start information described later is suspended.

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off. Although this symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a short time state (power support state), and a positive change state, and a state with special view positive change and It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In this specification, although the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 2) is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as the winning balls onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special view start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special drawing start port 232 is disposed below the common drawing start port 228. That is, the second special view start port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from either one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the gaming board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the face. On the other hand, the open state is the predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until a big hit game to be described later is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit game is started. In the closed state, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed, a state in which the game ball is slightly open to a substantially impossible level may be used. In addition, the variable winning opening may be any winning combination of game balls due to passage or entry of game balls, etc., and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven with the strength according to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the shooting rod 146 and the shooting rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball riding up by the game nail 238, etc. The passed ball enters the first special view starting opening 230 at the center of the stage 244. There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to hit the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  Decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to the rendering means, and among them, the decorative symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec seal 290 representing the specs of the game stand is attached at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control section 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and front frame door opening A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a bottom flat sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214; A symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, common view hold lamp 216, special view 1 hold lamp 218, special view 2 hold lamp 220, Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like) and various movable members for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 And a drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and the external terminal board 349. The gaming information (for example, gaming state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. Furthermore, although the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, it is configured such that signals such as commands can not be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. It is also good.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driver circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, and output from the speaker 120 And an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137 and detection signals from these sensors to the basic circuit 402. The image data etc. stored in the ROM 406 are read out based on signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404 A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 performs payout ball information indicating that payout of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been performed and payout of a predetermined number (for example, 25) of balls It outputs to the information input circuit 350, through the external terminal board 349, rental ball information etc. indicating that. Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects the front frame door 106 when it is open, and outputs an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs an open signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, the power control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 discharges the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.

  Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, the ball is inserted into special drawing 2 starting opening 232 A special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor which is a ball | bowl detection sensor detected that it was having a ball. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "the variation display of the special figure 1" (special figure Play the fluctuation game). Also, when the special figure 2 change game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment, "the variation display of the special figure 2" ( Perform special feature variation game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 As the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this “variable display of special view 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special view 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special view. The variable display of this special drawing may be performed several times continuously.

  FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special view 1. In FIG. 5 (a), nine types of special drawings, "special drawing A" to "special drawing I", are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and it is a 15R definite variation big hit symbol that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit symbol There is a real 5R probability variation big hit design that can not be expected to get out balls in the remaining rounds, while "Can be expected to get out balls in 5 of 15 rounds," "Special figure C" is a 15R big hit symbol Yes, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that you can expect to get out balls in all the 15 of the 15 rounds, and the "special figure D" is the 15R big hit symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is real 8R-RUB which can not expect the acquisition of the balls in the remaining rounds while the acquisition of the balls can be expected in the two rounds, and the "special figure E" is the pattern of the 15R big hit, 15 In the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that can not expect to get out balls, while "special figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol. Fig. G "is a 2R big hit symbol, and is a 2R positive variation hit symbol called a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation which can not be expected to be obtained in any round in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that makes it difficult for the player to identify to the player how many rounds that can be expected to be won at the start of the jackpot, and the specific round (for example, five rounds). It is a big hit which is directed in a manner of asking the player whether or not the round which can be expected to be won will continue when the eyes and the ninth round are reached.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether or not the special big hit is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between a normal big hit and a definite change big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (probably big hit) or low (usually a big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the end of the big hit game, it may shift to the time saving state (power support state). Here, the power support state is a predetermined condition in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-power support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit, etc. It means the state. The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. Thus, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/100 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), and increases to 99/100 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state). In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. Also, in the power-on state, the open time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special view 2 start port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-power-on state (power-tw open period extension). For example, in the non-power-supply state, the power-chw open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power-supply state. Furthermore, in the power-on state, the blade members 2321 open more easily than in the non-power-on state. For example, the blade member 2321 which opens only once in the non-power support state per one winning to the common drawing start port 228 opens twice in the power support state (open for 2 seconds and close for 1 second, and also for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased due to the extension of the power chewing open period and the increase in the number of power chewing open. In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. This is particularly likely to occur to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew having a small number of balls in a big hit game, and the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced. It is because there is. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time reduction state), all of the generalization probability change, the generalization change short period, the power chew open period extension, and the increase in the number of power chew open times are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if any one of the electric cho open period extension and the electric cho open number increase is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased, it may be set as the electric support state (short time state). In the non-power-supporting state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special view 2 start opening 232 than in the power-supporting state. As described above, the special view 2 start port 232 is changed to a winning difficult state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. In the special figure 2 start port 232, the entrance is in the easy-to-winning state in the power-supply state over a longer period than in the non-power-supply state. In the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, the power support state (common figure high probability state until the next big hit game is started) ) Is maintained, and when the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, and the 101st non-power Transition to the support state (generally low probability state). On the other hand, when the jackpot ("special figure G") without power support is won, it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished. In addition, when “special figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure low probability spread figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. In addition, when “special figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure high probability general drawing low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, one kind of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol besides the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum per one operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) in the first opening, or obtain a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls) If it does, the second and subsequent opening will not be performed. During the small hit game, transition to the special figure low probability spread map low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the small hit game starts after the small hit game is over. "Special figure H" shown in FIG. 5 (a) is a small hit design. In the present embodiment, the opening and closing mode (number of opening and closing times and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening and closing mode of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, the number of opening times and / or the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost design.

  FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 5 (b), six types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure f" are shown, of which five types of special figures are big hit symbols ("special figure a" to "special Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R big hit design, and it is a 15R probability variation big hit design that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "special figure b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to get out balls in all rounds of the round, "Special figure c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and it is expected to get out balls in 8 of 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB which can not expect to get out balls in the remaining rounds, and "Special figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol and can be expected to get out balls in 4 out of 15 rounds On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB which can not be expected to obtain the balls, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost design.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ······ Perform “variable display of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214. Then, the stop symbol form which is the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying 5R probability variation big hit (“Special figure B”), 5R normal big hit (“Special figure F”), 2R normal big hit (“Special figure e”), “decorate” in symbol display areas 208a to 208c A combination of three or more decorative designs of the same number other than 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "(for example," decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 "or" Stop the display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 etc.). In addition, when notifying 15R definite variation big hit ("special figure A" and "special figure a"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop display of decoration 7 ". Furthermore, when 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB and substantial 4R-RUB are to be notified, the left figure display area 208a and the right figure display area 208c are the decorative figures of the same number, and the middle figure display area 208b is The combination of the decorative designs which are the decorative designs (for example, "decorative 1-majesty-decorative 1", "decorative 4-majesty-decorative 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of notifying a hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or a small hit (“special figure H”) that is a big hit of 2R, “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop the display of the combination of decorative symbols such as 3 ". A combination of decorative designs such as "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the lost design of “special figure I” and “special figure f”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols explained so far (for example, loose) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop displaying the eyes).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, display from the start of the “variation display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the ball sensor has detected that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 detects that all seven segments are lit and one central segment. Repeat “Lighting” “variable display of common drawing” (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the "common figure A", which is a deviation from the "common figure A", which is a hit symbol, is displayed in a stopped state. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation display of the common drawing.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electricity support determination random value, and a special symbol determination random number are stored. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter which generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special drawings, special drawing winning random number values, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, an area for storing the number of reservations of the special view in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a storage area for the number of special drawings suspension. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special drawing divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas for which the start of the success / failure determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for common use is also prepared. In the start information storage unit for special drawing, as described later, a plurality of types of start information are made into one set, and the start information is stored for each area one set at a time in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supplied by the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment). When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the timer circuit 312 a numerical value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 shown in FIG. 2 is first turned on (indicating that there has been an operation) If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter are updated. For example, when the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (this process is not performed) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process error does not occur) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals representing that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area, respectively. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there has been a winning on these winning openings 234, 226 and these starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information of the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects entry of the ball into the first special view start port 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special view It is determined that there has been a prize in starting opening 230, that is, it is determined that a game medium which passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in first special drawing starting slot 230 is performed. If the information on the presence or absence does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special drawing start port 230 thereafter. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control symbol random number value and the random number The random number counter for generating each of the special figure random numbers is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the common pattern display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, and the second special view display device 214 Special figure display symbol update timer for clocking the time to display the fluctuation / stop, various timers including timer for clocking predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined closing time, predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 234 and 226 and starting openings 230 and 232 have a winning, the value of the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening in RAM 308 is calculated. It is read, 1 is added, and it sets to the original prize ball number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning reception process, if predetermined conditions are satisfied, plural types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an open area according to the winning order (order of suspension) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicates that the data is set) is shown in bit 7, bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off to be an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the lost symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 5 (c) and the lost symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of 3211, and information indicating a closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, as will be described later, the common drawing mistake flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as a common drawing timer random number value, and the common drawing display device 210 is generally selected from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value. One time for fluctuating display of a figure is selected, and this fluctuating display time is stored in a common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a common drawing fluctuation display time. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special drawing prefetch process (step S224) is performed. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later. Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 5R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, off flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag, and common drawing probability fluctuation flag . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), for example, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the spread map probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure a, the special figure b, the special figure c, or the special figure d shown in FIG. 5 (a), the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured such that the special probability e flag is turned off and the special probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special flag f is turned off when the lost flag is turned on. The 7 segment LED is turned on / off and drive control is performed, and in the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), lost symbol ( The finalized display of any one symbol of the special figure f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability fluctuation If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the solenoid of the door member of the variable winning opening 234 is driven to open and close (a part of various solenoids 332) until the variable winning opening 234 detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) of winning balls. Is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Set the information indicating the closing period to. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, Storage area for a production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set a standby period for displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended. The information which shows the presentation waiting period to is set to. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 start port 232 is likely to be longer than that in the general drawing low probability state (electric Chu open spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 opens more easily than in the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period is finished (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) having a high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) having a low degree of advantage. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a departure (decision determination) is performed using the qualification table stored in the table. Next, main control unit 300 uses the special drawing determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special drawing 2 random number value in the acquired special drawing 2 start information, the determined success or failure determination result, etc. Determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area 2 The number of reserved numbers in the storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of special figure 2 variation game with high degree of advantage and special figure 1 variation game with low degree of preference, special figure change game pertaining to the suspension of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 start starting prize winning It may be starting opening winning combination order fluctuation which starts in order. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the pending limit.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or one display may be configured to display a lottery result of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure which has stopped the variation first may affect the lottery result of the special figure which stops the variation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information which can specify the type of command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data contains various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special pattern probability change flags, timers selected in the special drawing related lottery process In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it includes information indicating the number etc., and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, values of special view probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a prize effect start command and end In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag or the like is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 Including presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, information such as the type of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Including.

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figures stored in the command data in the RAM 308 [2] Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game, etc. being held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special view 2 start port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common view display device 210 and the special view 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special view 2 display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. And then go into the HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special view look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and determines in advance the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The figure prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 is increased is stored, for example, in the special view 2 pending count stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and in the special view 2 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special figure 2 pre-reading number. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is the special view 2 look-ahead count and If equal, it is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the success / failure determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information in the special view 1 is increasing. As in the case of, for example, the special figure 2, the determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increased is the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support state), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not power is not being supplied, it may be determined whether the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance warning notification are satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always performed for the start information of the increased special figure 2, and pre-reading is always performed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to perform the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 9 exemplifies a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A illustrates an example of a state in which the special view 1 pre-reading result information is stored in the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of the special view 1 fluctuation game . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (a), "special figure I" (disappeared) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure I" as stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". Is stored, and "special map A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in storage area "hold 3" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I as stop symbol information in storage area" hold 4 ". "" Is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special view 2 pre-fetching result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 2 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (b), "special figure f" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and stop symbols in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4" Information is not stored. In addition, in FIG.9 (b), the state which stop symbol information is not memorize | stored in the storage area is described as "none."

  FIG. 9C shows an example of a special-purpose look-ahead result storage unit for special view 1 during power support. As shown in FIG. 9C, in the storage area "pending 1", "not determined" information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the propriety determination result, the fluctuation timer number (variation time), the timer group to be described later are determined in advance, and such information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result It can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as information.

  Next, FIG. 10 is referred to for the table for determination of acceptance used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for acceptance determination, and FIG. 10 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for acceptance determination. In the case of performing the success or failure judgment of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure high probability state, referring to the high probability table for success or failure judgment shown in FIG. Referring to the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 change game, the big hit, the small hit or the release is selected as the result of the pass / fail determination.

  Similarly, in the case of the special view high probability state, the special view low probability state shown in FIG. In the case, the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 10B is referred to. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special view 2 change game, a jackpot or an omission is selected as a result of the pass / fail judgment.

  FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of the small hitting determination table. When the jackpot judgment result of the big hit is lost, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and the referred small hit judgment table indicates the numerical range and the acquired random number value. , Select the success or failure judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the success or failure judgment result and the loss is Although it is selected, in the case where the determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 2, no small hit is selected.

  Next, a stop is performed based on the result of determination of success or failure determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A special drawing determination table used to determine a symbol will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a view showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a view showing an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When deciding the stop design of the special figure 1, referring to the special figure 1 design determination table which is shown in figure 11 (a), special figure on the basis of the result of the success and failure of the special figure 1 and the numerical value range of the random number Select 1 stop symbol. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 1 is a big hit, any one of the special view A to the special view G is selected, and when the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 is a small hit, When the special view H is selected and the success or failure result of the special view 1 is lost, the special view I is selected.

  In addition, when deciding the stop design of the special figure 2, referring to the table for special figure 2 design decision which is shown in figure 11 (b), on the basis of the result of the success and failure of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of random number, We draw the stop symbol of the special figure 2. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a big hit, any one of the special views a to e is selected, and when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a loss, the special view f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special view display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when the depression of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data according to the depression of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, when there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S601 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S603 following step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S421), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  FIG. 12D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. If not (step S703: No), the process waits for the input of the transfer end interrupt signal.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S 701, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S 707 following step S 705, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes). The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S801, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 807 following step S 805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S809 following step S807, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S 807, processing such as reading out effect data (effect data by effect movable body 224 or effect data by lamp) corresponding to this command is performed from ROM 506, and the effect data is updated. If it is necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first auxiliary control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S 803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, processing for updating the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 14, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special view 1 holding lamp 218, the special view 2 holding lamp 220, and the drawing The hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14A, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a fourth symbol display area 284 is provided in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or while the symbol is stopped), and from the top, the notification area during symbol fluctuation of the common figure, the notification region during symbol fluctuation of the special figure 1 , It becomes a notification area during symbol change of the special figure 2. While a figure of a square is lit and displayed while the symbol of the common figure is stopped, the figure of the square is blinked or extinguished while the symbol of the common figure changes. While the special figure 1 symbol is stopped, a round figure is lit and displayed, but while the special figure 1 symbol is fluctuating, the round figure is blinked or turned off. While the special figure 2 symbol is stopped, a triangular figure is lit and displayed, while the special figure 2 symbol is changed, the triangular figure is blinked or extinguished. As described above, the fourth symbol not only differs in display position, but also in display mode (shape in this case), so that the determination can be made only when the player looks at first glance. The preview notice may be made by changing the display mode, the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 14 is a non-power-supporting state (non-time-shorting state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, a reserved icon display area 281 of Special Figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area 280. In addition, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special view 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  A reserve icon representing the reserve of special figure 1 is displayed in the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and a reserve icon representing reserve of the special figure 2 is displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 . The number of reservations for Special Figure 1 is also represented by the number of suspension icons for Special Figure 1 in addition to the number of lights for Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218, and the number of reservations for Special Figure 2 is the number of illuminations for Special Figure 2 Hold lamp 220 In addition, it is also represented by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, with the reserve icon on the right side becoming the hold icon with older prize winnings, and in the reserve icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserve icons are displayed vertically The lower the pending icon, the older the winning icon will be.

  In FIG. 14A, two reserve icons h11 and h12 for the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserve icon display area 281 for the special figure 1, and both reserve icons h11 and h12 for the two special figures 1 are displayed. , And the default display mode (round non-pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 14A, in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons which are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special view 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 14 is the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult to open the power chute and the special figure 2 start opening 232 has difficulty in winning This is because In addition, although the line which defines an area | region is not actually displayed, the line which demarcates an area | region is specifically displayed in the pending | holding icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, ie, the pending | holding icon display area provided in the right end Are shown in dotted lines for clarity. It should be noted that a line defining the area may be provided, or a line defining the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Moreover, in order to make it clear that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons which are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, according to the control state (playing state), the reserved icon display area of the special figure in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 which is easy to win is the left side of the variation icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the reserved icon display area of the other special view is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 14A, the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special view 2 An area 282 is displayed at the right end. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the reserved icon display area 282 of the special view 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208 d, and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the reserved icon of the special view 2 is a rectangular non-patterned and white display mode, and the display position of the special icon 1 is different from that of the reserved icon. Here, the shape is also different, and the determination can be made at a glance of the player. In addition, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 may be the same.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is a row in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the blinking start or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decoration symbol Although this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 14 (b), the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon or decoration is performed. There has been no change in the design yet.

  In FIG. 14 (c), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 is started. The movement animation here starts the movement of the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol variation) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 toward the variation icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special view 1. At this stage, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not started.

  In (d) of FIG. 14, the moving animation continues, and in (e) of FIG. 14, the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. The hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of fluctuation, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but still at this stage, The variable display of the decorative pattern has not been started. In addition, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h11 may be regarded as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon so far The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (g), an operation promotion notification image 136P prompting the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at which the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. Although the variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, the player can recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 14 (h), the effective period is reduced, and in FIG. 14 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, as shown in FIG. 14 (j), a reach state rush notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state rush notice image 2071, a character display “chance” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 14 (k), the reach state rush notice image 2071 disappears, and the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and thereafter, it enters the reach state as shown in FIG. 14 (l). Although the reach state rush notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but it may always be entered.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect serving as a trigger for an advance notice regarding the symbol variation display currently performed.

  In FIG. 14 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variation icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed in FIG. , Has developed into a super reach (Swordsman reach). The image of the swordmaster of the enemy character is displayed large on the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (n), and the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (o) continues the battle between the hero of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character. The animation of the scene is displayed.

  It should be noted that the reach state rush notice image 2071 may be not only a notice of rushing into the reach state but also a notice of development to super reach.

  FIG. 15: is a figure which shows sequentially the example of an effect shown in FIG. 14 in steps.

  In FIG. 15 (p) continued from FIG. 14 (o), animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 15 (s). In FIG. 15 (s), the main character of the hero wins the swordsman of the enemy character, and in FIG. 15 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a background image different from before. Soon, as shown to the figure (u), the fluctuation | variation fluctuation | variation of the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a different background image. Further, the display of the variation icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of 15R probability variation big hit confirmation of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown to FIG. 15 (v) is on. In FIG. 15 (v), although the background is hidden, a background image different from the default is actually displayed. Soon, in FIG. 15 (w), as a jackpot game start effect, a character display of “probably variable jackpot” is performed together with a background image (omitted here) for celebrating the jackpot.

  On the other hand, when it is in the reach state with different decorative symbols in FIG. 14 (l) (symbol combinations that are actually 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), another figure continuing from FIG. 15 (t) In 15 (u '), the fluctuation variation of the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed, and in Fig. 15 (v') following Fig. 15 (u '), "decoration 6-decoration The combination of the decoration pattern of the big hit of 6-decoration 6 "is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 15 (w ') following FIG. 15 (v'), a character display of "big hit" is made together with a background image (omitted here) for celebrating the big hit as a big hit game start effect.

  FIG. 16: is a figure which shows gradually an example of the presentation of another case following FIG.15 (q) in steps.

  In FIG. 16 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 14 (o) continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 16 (b). In FIG. 16 (b), the main character of the hero is defeated by the swordsman of the enemy, and in FIG. 16 (c), as in FIG. 15 (t), all is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Soon, in FIG. 16 (d), the fluctuation of the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" starts. Here, the display of the variation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special view 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (e), the fourth pattern (round figure) of the special figure 1 lights up, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" stops It is displayed. Next, during the finalized display period of the special view 1, in the variable icon display area 280, the deletion animation of the variable icon h0 is executed. In the figure (f), the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 is started, and in the figure (g), the deletion animation continues, and the fluctuation icon h0 disappears completely in the figure (h). In addition, before the finalized display of the special view 1 is performed, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 may be executed.

  Next, the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Here, FIG. 17A is a view for explaining a display example of the notice icon, and FIG. 17B is a view for explaining a notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 8C is a view for explaining an example of the digest timing of the advance notice icon, and FIG. 7D is a view for explaining an example of the increase timing of the advance notice icon. FIG. 18A is a view for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and FIG. 18B is a view for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas, and from the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, the notice icon fourth display The area YA4, the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and the notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of pending icons that can be displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is four (or the number of available pending icons when the additional icon display area of the special view 2 is further displayed) Is a total of eight), so it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 differs from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the number of preview icons that can be displayed and the number of pending icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the advance notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one, or may be set to any number of two or more. Also, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  In the notice icon display area 285, one notice icon may be displayed for one area. For example, as shown in FIG. 17A, in the notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon I6 of a hat consisting of a symbol of a hat is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, A notice icon I9 of a box consisting of symbols is displayed, and a notice icon I10 of a fan consisting of a fan icon is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. A notice icon fourth display area YA4 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken consisting of the design of the shuriken is displayed, and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon consisting of the ribbon design is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and the notice icon sixth display area YA6 is It is blank. As to which notice icon is to be displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285, based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. It is determined. In this embodiment, one notice icon is displayed for one area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed for one area.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (c), for example. To be controlled. The control information is stored, for example, in the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 in accordance with the progress of the game, and read and executed as appropriate. That is, eight seconds after the start of the variation display (the variation) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 17 (a), the notice icon I8 of the ribbon is digested, and then it is displayed as the notice icon I8 of the digested ribbon. A corresponding effect may be performed. Thereafter, when the change ends, the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and when the change display of the decorative symbol (symbol change corresponding to the hold 1) is started, When 12 seconds have passed after the start of the symbol variation, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the notice icon I7 of the digested shuriken may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is finished, the hold icon h11 (the hold icon h12 is moved to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 17A) of the special figure 1 moves toward the change icon display area 280 When the variation display of the decorative symbol (symbol variation corresponding to hold 2) is started and 4 seconds have passed since the symbol variation was started, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, and An effect corresponding to the digested hat advance notice icon I6 may be executed. In addition, when 10 seconds have elapsed after the SP reach is started, the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the notice icon I9 of the one thousand boxes digested may be executed. Thereafter, when 2 seconds have passed after all the decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped, the fan announcement icon I10 may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the digested fan announcement icon I10 may be executed. . As described above, it can be said that the digesting of the advance notice icon is to notify the player in advance that the advance notice and the effect are to be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is, for example, the timing shown in FIG. It is controlled to be increased by The control information is stored, for example, in the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 in accordance with the progress of the game, and read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the change display (the change) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 17A, a ton symbol appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a toll effect effect to increase the notice icon is executed. Be done. In this hall effect, an effect of increasing and displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. Thereafter, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is started, DJ effects appear on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the notice icon is increased. In this DJ effect, an effect of increasing and displaying the notice icon I9 of the one-man box in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. After that, the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is finished, and after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the second pseudo-sequence effect, the hall effect is executed and the fan An effect of increasing and displaying the notice icon I10 of the second notice icon 10 in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. Here, the pseudo-series effect is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol which executes the variation start and temporary stop display of the decoration symbol a plurality of times in the variation display of one special figure.

  In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol change display that is a big hit may be configured to be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol change display that is a departure. For example, it is possible to set the number of notice icons to be increased up to one in symbol fluctuation display to be out, and to increase the number of notice icons to increase in symbol fluctuation display to be a big hit.

  Next, the effect contents corresponding to the type of notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As the advance notice icon, as shown in FIG. 18 (a), there are an icon whose content of the corresponding effect is not clear and an event whose corresponding content of the effect is clear as shown in FIG. 18 (b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 18 (a), the notice icon (the notice icon before change) in which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear includes the first notice icon I1 of the first lord and the second notice icon I2 of the second lord. , And the third icon for the notice icon I3 and the first button notification icon I4. The first hallmark's notice icon I1 is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the hall in white, and the jackpot has a low degree of reliability. In addition, the second icon of condolence announcement icon I2 is a notice icon representing the silhouette of the face of the statue of honor in green, and the reliability of the jackpot is medium. In addition, the third hallmark's notice icon I3 is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the hall in red, and the jackpot has a high degree of reliability. Further, the first button preview icon I4 is a preview icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the jackpot is either weak or strong. The first hallmark notice icon I1, the second hallmark notice icon I2, and the third hallmark notice icon I3 are displayed at predetermined change display timings (for example, timing of the increase display of the notice icons). It changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in 18 (b). Further, the first button preview icon I4 changes to any of the preview icons after the change shown in FIG. 18B at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. Note that the first button preview icon I4 may be changed to any of the pre-change preview icons at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

  In this way, the first tonome preview icon I1, the second tonosho notice icon I2, the third tonosho preview icon I3 and the first button preview icon I4 start to change symbol patterns to be read ahead. May be displayed before the event, and may function as a pre-reading notice. Also, in the present embodiment, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, there may be a case where a character indication is displayed accompanying the notice icon, which will be described later. When the notice icon I2 of Tonosama 2 and the notice icon I3 of the third donkey are displayed, a “question mark” may be added and displayed.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 18B, the notice icon (the notice icon after change) in which the content of the corresponding effect is clear includes a notice icon I6 of a hat, a notice icon I7 of a shuriken, and a ribbon. There are a notice icon I8, a notice box I9 of one thousand boxes, a notice icon I10 of a fan, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notification icon I6 is a notification icon that imitates a hat worn by the character of the captain, and the jackpot has a high degree or a low degree of reliability. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, the pseudo-sequence effect may be performed only once. Here, there are a strong pattern, a weak pattern and a cassette pattern in the pseudo-series effect. For example, as described later, when a pseudo-sequence effect starts, a character of a bancho appears, but the display mode of the character of the bancho is different from the normal (for example, a bancho is an aura). By displaying the wrapped display mode, it is notified that the reliability is a strong degree. In addition, for example, although it is the second pseudo-series effect, it may be notified that it is the third pseudo-series effect to indicate that the reliability is high. Further, the pseudo-series effect of the weak pattern informs that the reliability is about the weak degree by displaying the appearing leader character in the normal display mode. Further, as described later, the pseudo-series effect of the cassette pattern is an effect of performing the off-set display while making it appear that the pseudo-series effect is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter display is displayed accompanying the notice icon I6 of the hat, if the degree of reliability is a high degree, “continuation” is displayed as red pattern or black character as A pattern. May be Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. Also, if the degree of reliability is weak, it may be displayed as “continuation” with “continuation” or “question mark” in black letters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-series effect may be always performed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The notice icon I7 of the shuriken is a notice icon imitating a shuriken thrown by the character of the gardener (ninja), and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I7 of one shuriken is digested, if the reliability of the big hit is a high degree, the case where the notice effect under execution switches to a highly reliable strong notice effect via freeze effect may be executed Yes (Freeze Notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be performed in which a part or all of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol are notified in advance. Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, “freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern if the degree of reliability is high. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the degree of reliability is low, "A-ch" may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested, either one of the freeze notice and the stop symbol notice may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The notice icon I8 of the ribbon is a notice icon imitating the ribbon worn by the character of Princess Chibi, and the jackpot has a high degree or a low degree of reliability. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the big hit is a high degree, an effect that the background shifts to a special stage such as the pre-reading mode or the change notice mode may be executed (stage change Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, an effect may be executed to change the displayed background to any one of a plurality of backgrounds used in the normal gaming state (weak stage change) Production). Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter display is displayed accompanying the notice icon I 8 of the ribbon, “Steachen” is displayed in red or black as “A” pattern if the degree of reliability is high. May be Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. Also, if the degree of reliability is weak, black letters “Stéchen” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I8 on the ribbon is digested, either one of the stage change strong presentation and the stage change weak presentation may be performed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The notice icon I9 of the one thousand box is a notice icon imitating a thousand box thrown by the character of the lady towards the peasant, and the reliability of the big hit is determined to be a big hit, strong or weak. When the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested, if the reliability of the big hit is a strong degree, the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested during the execution of the low-reliability weak reach production, and the reach transition production is performed. After that, an instruction to shift (promotion) to strong reach effect with high reliability is performed (reach transition effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, the one-two box notice icon I9 is digested after the execution of the low-reliability weak cut-in notice, and then the highly-reliable strong cut-in notice is executed (notice promotion Production). In addition, if it is a big hit decision, either reach transition production or advance promotion production is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter notation is displayed in addition to the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes, in the case of the big hit confirmation, “Ball behavior” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the degree of reliability is high, "promotion" may be displayed in red or black as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the degree of reliability is weak, black letters “promotion” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested, one of the finalization effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance promotion effect may be performed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon imitating a fan worn by a princess character, and the jackpot reliability is determined to be a jackpot. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is digested, the appearance of a premier notice notifying in advance that the big hit has been decided, or a premier reach where the big hit is decided (premium effect). Alternatively, the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested after reach is displayed, and a resurrection effect that is a big hit is performed (resurrection effect). Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter notation is displayed accompanying to the notice icon I10 of the fan, "blessing" may be displayed. In addition, when the advance notice icon I10 of the fan is digested, either one of the premiere effect and the revival effect may be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the contents to be produced are different depending on the timing at which the fan advance icon I10 is digested, but the digestion timing may be the same.

  The second button preview icon I11 is a preview icon imitating the effect button 136, and the jackpot reliability is either the weakest or the jackpot finalized. When one second button preview icon I11 is digested, a button effect for urging the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, when the operation reception period is started and the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period, the digest display of the second button preview icon I11 is the hat forecast icon I6, the Shuriken forecast icon I7, and the ribbon The corresponding presentation may be performed by changing to any one of the preliminary display icon I 8, the preliminary display icon I 8 of the two-tiered box, and the preliminary display icon I 10 of the fan. Alternatively, it may be erased and displayed without changing to any of the notice icons.

  In the present embodiment, when the notice icon before the change changes to the notice icon after the change, the change display of the notice icon is performed. However, the change icon of the notice icon before the change is displayed It is also possible to perform display for deleting the advance notice icon (notice icon “none” shown in item 5 of FIG. 18 (b): elimination effect). In this effect, it is informed that the change is out. That is, it is a preliminary notice indicating that it is an outset confirmation pattern. Naturally, reliability is the weakest. In addition, even if the elimination effect is executed, it may be a big hit.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 19, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special view display device 212, a second special view display device 214, a general drawing display device 210, a first special view holding lamp 218, a second special view holding lamp 220, a general drawing A graphic reserve lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the fourth symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 14, and displays the display result of the fourth symbol according to the light emission mode of the LED, for example. It is possible to The fourth symbol display device 284a may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284a is provided, for example, at a predetermined position of the game board 200, and is driven and controlled by the first sub control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a notification region during symbol variation of the general drawing, a notification region during symbol variation of the special drawing 1, and a notification region during symbol variation of the special drawing 2. While the symbol of the common figure is stopped, the LED of the area where the rectangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but is blinked or turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the common figure. While the special figure 1 symbol is stopped, the LED of the area where the round figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but is blinked or extinguished while the special figure 1 symbol is fluctuating. While the special figure 2 symbol is stopped, the LED of the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but is blinked or extinguished while the special figure 2 symbol is changing. As described above, the fourth symbol not only differs in display position, but also in display mode (shape in this case), so that the determination can be made only when the player looks at first glance. The preview notice may be made by changing the display mode, the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. In addition, the fourth symbol may be lighted and displayed during symbol fluctuation, and may be extinguished and displayed while symbol stopping.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 19A, the notice icon is not displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 19 (1), symbol variation display is performed in the first special view display device 212, and in response to this, variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the decoration symbol display device 208. In addition, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special view 1 is performed. The advance notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed or may not be displayed as needed.

  Further, in FIG. 19 (1), the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special views 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1, The two reserved icons h11 and h12 and the variation icon h0 are displayed in the default display mode (round no-pattern and white display mode). Although the display of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special view 2 is omitted in this effect example, the second reserved icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (2), when the gaming ball is won in the first special view starting opening 230, the number of lighting in the first special view holding lamp 218 is increased by one and becomes three. It is shown that the number is three. In addition, a third reserved icon h13 of the special view 1 is also displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1. The third hold is a pre-read target hold, which is a trigger that triggers whether or not to display a notice icon as described later. For convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 which is the target of pre-reading is hatched and shown, but it is actually the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figure 1 It is a display mode (round non-pattern and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7", and the display result of off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  And in FIG. 19 (4), the symbol variation in the 1st Special Figure display device 212 is started, and also until the light extinction of the 4th symbol is performed, the change is not yet made to the reservation icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 19 (5), the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 of the special figure 1 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area 280 And the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special view It becomes one second holding icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the crown pattern effect is started. This is an effect to be executed when it is determined to display the advance notice icon based on the pre-read result. Here, the character of the lord YM is in possession of the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  Then, after the main character YM is moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (7), the notice icon I6 of the hat held by the hat is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display for throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the character of the lord YM succeeds in displaying the advance notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notification icon I6 will be executed in the future. That is, by displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285, it can be said that it is indicated that the pseudo-series effect will be performed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19 (11) to FIG. 12 (12), a display is performed in which the character YM of the crown pattern is framed out below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 20 shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 in stages.

  In FIG. 20 (14) continued from FIG. 19 (13), the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and further until the fourth symbol is turned off, the change to the reserved icon or the decorative symbol is It has not happened yet.

  In FIG. 20 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes It becomes the icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 20 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a crown pattern effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the advance notice icon based on the result of the pre-reading of the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the character of the lord YM is in possession of a notice icon I6 of a hat, a notice icon I9 of a box, and a notice icon I10 of a fan.

  Then, after the tomoku character YM is moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (17), the notice icon I6 of the hat held by the timing shown in FIG. An effect display is performed in which the icon I9 and the fan advance notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of the one-and-two box is the notice icon third display area The notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. After that, the same effect display as that of FIG. 19 (10) to FIG. 19 (12) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the off is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Then, in FIG. 20 (21), symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and furthermore, the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the reserved icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 20 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and changes to the fluctuation icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 20 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the notice icon digesting effect for digesting the notice icon is performed in this manner. When two or more same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, two notice icons I6 of hats are displayed as shown in FIG. 20 (23), for example, on the left side. Although it is preset to preferentially digest the displayed preview icons, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the preview icons. Further, which notice icon to use may be determined randomly, or may be set to preferentially consume the notice icon displayed on the right. That is, the order of digesting the advance notice icons can be set appropriately as limited to those described above.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (24) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "CONTINUE" is displayed as a notice of anticipation that the pseudo-series effect will be performed. In addition, this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or is performed after the enlarged display. It is also good. Further, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, for example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed from the default display mode of the display of the fluctuation icon h0 to the display mode of the advance notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (26), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased along with the character display of "CONTINUE", and then as shown in FIG. The left symbol and the right symbol are displayed stopped. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left pattern, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right pattern. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  FIG. 21: is a figure which shows sequentially the example of an effect shown in FIG. 20 in steps.

  In FIG. 21 (28) continued from FIG. 20 (27), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped and displayed right The effect display is performed to push up the symbol, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the pseudo-series effect may be started. In the present embodiment, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again after the bancho character BC lifts the right symbol, but for example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, “ As a decoration 1 ′ ′), a reach state may be formed, and reach effect may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, the pseudo-connected symbol in which the character is represented is The display moving at a low speed is performed from the upper side to the lower side.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-connected symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display of is performed. In this embodiment, in this way, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. In addition, when the pseudo run pattern is frame-displayed downward without being stopped and displayed, the pseudo run is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the off state is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, even when the notice icon I6 of the hat is not digested, there may be a case where the pseudo-series effect is executed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo x 2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-series effect has been started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of “decorative 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. . At this time, reach production has not been started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 21C (34), display in which the hat notification icon I6 displayed in the notification icon second display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is moved from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (35), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "CONTINUE" is displayed as a notice of anticipation that the pseudo-series effect will be performed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (37), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased along with the character display of "CONTINUE". Thereafter, in FIG. 21 (38) In response to the finalization of the notice icon I6, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display is performed to push up the right symbol being stopped and displayed, and the second pseudo-sequence effect is performed. Is notified to the player that there is a possibility that

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character BC of the bancho has pushed up the right symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is “decoration 1” The decoration is changed to “2”, and a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208 b, a display in which the pseudo-connected symbol moves at low speed from the upper side to the lower side is performed. At this time, while the pseudo run symbol is displayed, the character information of "pseudo x 2" is deleted, but the display may be continued. Moreover, while the pseudo run symbol is displayed, the character information of "pseudo x 2" may be displayed in another area. Moreover, while the pseudo run symbol is displayed, the display mode of the character information of "pseudo x 2" may be changed. In this example of production, after the character BC of the Bancho has pushed up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again, the reach state may be maintained, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-connected symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 21 (40), as shown in FIG. The cut-in display including the character display is performed to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. In this embodiment, it is configured to be more likely to be a big hit as the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested in one time of symbol variation display. That is, in the case where only one notice icon I6 of the hat is digested and the pseudo-sequence effect is performed only once, and in the case where the two notice icons I6 of the hat are digested and the pseudo-sequence effect is performed twice, the hat It is easy to become a big hit if the two previous notice icons I6 are digested, and only two of the two hat announcement icons I6 are digested, and the three hat announcement icons I6 are digested. It can be said that it is easy to become a big hit if three preliminary announcement icons I6 of the hat are digested, in the case where the pseudo-sequence effect is performed three times.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (42), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo x 3” is displayed, which indicates that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous effect has been started.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step.

  In FIG. 22 (43) continued from FIG. 21 (42), the decorative symbols of “decoration 1” are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Here, reach effect is to be started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (44), it develops into the above-described super reach (swords reach). In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed so far in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c moves to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, Is displayed. The image of the sword sword master of the enemy character is displayed large in the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (44), and the battle battle between the hero of the main character and the sword sword of the enemy character is continued in the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Animation display of the scene is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (46), the display in which the notice icons I9 of the one and two box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the one-hand box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I9 of the one-man box moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enlarged icon is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (47) and above the notice icon I9 of the one-man box displayed. The word "promotion" is displayed as a reminder to shift to a highly reliable presentation. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the one-two box advance notice icon I9 is displayed enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or is performed after the enlarged display. It is also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the notice icon I9 of the one-and-two box with the character display of "promotion" at the timing of FIG. 22 (48). At the timing of 22 (49), the above-described reach transition effect is started. When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display being executed becomes slightly darker, and the character of the lord appears in the cut-in display, A display is made to turn off the reach effect display in progress, and then the background is darkened as shown in FIG. 22 (50).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (51), in the decorative symbol display device 208, strong reach effect (button reach effect) with high reliability is started. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (51), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character display “is it too hot” is displayed on the dark background, FIG. 22 (52) At the timing shown in, the character display "NO" is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (53), the character display of "one blow" is performed to notify that the button effect is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 is possible, to the player The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (55), as shown in FIG. 22 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is erased. It is shown that the button reach production has failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 22 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 1".

  FIG. 23: is a figure which shows sequentially the example of an effect shown in FIG. 22 in steps.

  In FIG. 23 (58) continued from FIG. 22 (57), all including the advance notice icon display area 285 are temporarily hidden. Soon, in FIG. 23 (59), the swing fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1” starts. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have passed since the temporary symbol stop display, display at which the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the fourth notice area YA4 of the notice icon is digested is started at the timing shown in FIG. . That is, display is performed such that the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I10 of the fan moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (61). At this time, for example, below the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in an enlarged manner, a letter display of "blessing" may be added to notify that the big hit is determined. In addition, in the case of appending the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I10 of the fan is enlarged, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after being enlarged.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the notice icon I10 of the fan at the timing of FIG. 23 (62), and the notice icon display area 285 is framed upward. To be displayed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (63), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols that were fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed and re-variation effect is started . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely framed out. The notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 23 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed in reduced size. Ru.

  Soon, as shown in FIG. 23 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed.

  And in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown in FIG. 23 (66), the combination of the decoration pattern of the big hit decision of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first special view display device 212, the "special view A", which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth pattern display device 284a, the fourth pattern (round figure) of the special view 1 Is on. Thereafter, although not shown, a big hit game is started after the above-mentioned big hit game start effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the re-variation effect is executed and becomes a big hit by digesting the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285, but the notice icon I10 of the fan is the notice icon display area When the display is not displayed at 285, the display result of the removal may be derived without performing the re-variation effect. That is, when the reach transition effect performed by digesting the one-two box notice icon I9 is performed and becomes a departure, this reach transfer effect can be said to be a false advance effect. That is, when one notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested, if reach transition effect as a false notice of a type corresponding to the last notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is executed, the result of the symbol variation display It can be said that the The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 for the hat, the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I7 for the shuriken, and the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I8 for the ribbon.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice effect can be performed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the advance notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the advance notice may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, although the preview icon is digested only during execution of the symbol variation display which is the target of the preview preview, and the effect corresponding to the digested preview icon is executed, it is the target of the preview preview. Also in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be digested to execute the effect corresponding to the notice icon. In this case, the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display to be prefetched notice and the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display to be executed prior to the symbol variation display to be prefetched notice are made different. It may be the same or may be the same.

  Next, another example of the effect of the above-described increase in the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 24 to FIG. 26 are diagrams showing gradually another example of effect of the increase effect of the advance notice icon. In FIGS. 24 to 26, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIG. 24 (8 a) to FIG. 10 (10 a) show another example of effects of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 24 (8a), an effect display is performed in which the first hallmark notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9a-1), the thrown first hallmark notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (9a-2), the display shown in FIG. 24 (10a) is performed after the display in which the first condolences' notice icon I1 displayed in the advance icon display area 285 explodes. Then, the notice icon I1 of the first tonome who has exploded is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and an effect display is performed in which the tonome character YM is happy to be displayed increasing the notice icon. Also according to this presentation example, the player expects that the presentation corresponding to the hat notification icon I6 will be executed in the future.

  FIGS. 24 (8 b) to (9 b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (8 b), an effect display in which the first button preview icon I 4 is thrown toward the preview icon display area 285 instead of the hat preview icon I 6 is displayed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9 b), the thrown first button preview icon I 4 is displayed in the preview icon first display area YA 1 of the preview icon display area 285. If the effect button 136 is operated after the first button preview icon I4 is displayed in the preview icon display area 285 and before the first button preview icon I4 is digested, the first hallmark's It changes to any one of the notice icon I1, the second notice icon I2 of the second hall, and the notice icon I3 of the third hall. As described above, in this example of the effect, since the reliability of the big hit indicated by the advance notice icon is difficult to recognize until the effect button 136 is operated, the incentive to operate the effect button 136 to know the reliability of the big hit There are cases where it is possible to improve the stage effect. Note that the period from when the first button preview icon I4 is displayed in the preview icon display area 285 until it is digested may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button advance notice icon I4 is displayed across a plurality of times of symbol variation display, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period, or the symbol Even during the stop display period, the operation of the effect button 136 may be enabled. In addition, when the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is digested, a notice icon that is to be displayed when the effect button 136 is operated at the time of finishing the notice icon is displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or a button effect is performed when the first button preview icon I4 is digested, and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136, The effect display corresponding to the notice icon scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or the notice scheduled to be displayed when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. In addition, after the first button notice icon I4 is digested and the button effect is started, the notice icon to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136 The effect display corresponding to may be performed. In addition, when the button effect is performed, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, the effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect is started may be performed. Further, the first button preview icon may not be changed to another preview icon even if the effect button 136 is operated until the first button preview icon I4 is digested.

  FIG. 24 (8 c) to FIG. 9 (9 c) show other examples of effects of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (8c), as in the case of FIG. 19 (8), an effect display in which the hat advance icon I6 is thrown toward the advance icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 24 (9 c), it is shown that the hat advance notice icon I 6 does not reach the advance notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the case increase effect that fails to increase the notice icon. In addition, a garbled increase presentation may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, as the notice icon having a higher jackpot reliability, the caster increase presentation may be less likely to be performed.

  FIGS. 24 (7d) to (9d) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (7d), as in FIG. 19 (7), the manner in which the character YM of the lady with the hat advance icon I6 is moved to the predetermined throwing position is displayed. After that, in FIG. 24 (8 d), an effect display is performed in which not only one hat notification icon I 6 but also three hat notification icons I 6 are simultaneously thrown toward the notification icon display area 285. In addition, it may not be simultaneous but it may be an effect display in which one by one is thrown sequentially.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9 d), the notice icons I6 of the three thrown hats are the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display of the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to execute the increase of the plurality of advance notice icons in one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at one time, the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notice may be improved, and the effect of presentation may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (9 d), the same notice icon (for example, hat notice icon I6) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 by a predetermined number (for example, three) or more. It is also possible to give notice that the jackpot will be decided because it is guaranteed that the effect will be executed three times. Also, a highly reliable notice icon is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and a notice icon with low reliability is easily displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (easily stocked). Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9d ′), some or all of the three hat preview icons I6 that have been thrown do not reach the preview icon display area 285, and from the left of the display area It is also possible to execute a partial increase increase effect or a full increase increase effect which causes a frame out.

  FIGS. 24 (7e) to (9e) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (7e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 19 (7), the character YM of a lady like having a notice icon I9 of one box and a notice icon I10 of a fan in addition to the notice icon I6 of one hat. Is shown moved to a predetermined throwing position. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest degree of reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or only the notice icon with the highest degree of reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon randomly selected may be displayed. You may make it display only. After that, in FIG. 24 (8e), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may not be simultaneous but it may be an effect display in which one by one is thrown sequentially. Further, as described above, the three notice icons do not have to be different from each other. For example, the same notice icon may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9e), the three notice icons thrown are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285. Each will be displayed. As described above, also in this effect example, it is possible to execute the increase of a plurality of types of advance notice icons in one increase effect. Therefore, the expectation for the increase in the number of times of execution of the notice can be improved by increasing the number of notice icons at one time, and the sense of expectation for the execution of a plurality of kinds of notice can be enhanced. There is a case.

  Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9e ′), a part or all of the three preview icons thrown does not reach the preview icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is also possible to execute a partial increase increase effect or a full increase increase effect which causes a frame out from the left of the area.

  FIG. 24 (12 f-1) to FIG. 24 (12 f-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 19 (12). That is, in FIG. 24 (12f-1), as in the case of FIG. 19 (12), the variation display of the decorative symbol in the state where the hat forecast icon I6 is displayed in the forecast icon first display area YA1 of the forecast icon display area 285. Has been done. After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (12f-2), the decoration symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and reach effect is started. Ru. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be performed even in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed. In addition, as a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the end of the big hit.

  FIG. 25 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8 g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode (the display mode by the character of Sabohani) of the prefetch notice, the character YM of the ladylike hat has the notice icon I6 of the hat the notice icon display area 285 There is an effect display that throws in towards the. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the increase presentation of the notice icon even during the execution of the advance notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase presentation of the advance notice icon and the advance notice by the hold icon may not be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 25 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8 h), the decoration icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the presentation holding lamp 286 is set to a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208) to display the number of reservations. The effect holding lamp 286 is provided with, for example, a full color LED, and is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting according to the default light emission mode (for example, lighting in white) It is possible to perform drive control in an aspect (for example, lighting while switching 7 colors). In FIG. 25 (8h), for the convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 which is the target of the pre-reading is hatched and shown, but in fact, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similar to the hold lamp of, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 is turned on by the default light emission mode.

  FIGS. 25 (8i) to (9i-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 25 (8i), as in the case of FIG. 19 (8), the effect display is performed in which the hat advance icon I6 is thrown toward the advance icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 25 (9i-1), it is shown that the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (9i-2), the hat advance notice icon I6 acts on the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 and the display mode of the prefetch notice. The effect display (hold change effect) changing to is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the hat advance notice icon I6 may not be displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the advance notice by the hold icon. Note that the on-hold change presentation may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat advance notice icon I6. For example, the on-hold change presentation may be less likely to be performed as the notice icon having a higher jackpot reliability.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 26 (9i-2 ′), the decoration symbol display device 208 does not display the variation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 and is held using the presentation hold lamp 286 In the case of displaying the number, the light emission mode of the hold lamp of the first special drawing 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the preview advance notice after the notice icon I6 of the hat falls below the display area.

  FIGS. 25 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 19 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 25 (8j), unlike FIG. 19 (8). It is shown that the character BY of the DJ having the notice icon, not the character YM of the lord, appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area (DJ effect). In the example shown in FIG. 25 (8j), the DJ character appears with the hat announcement icon I6. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (9 j), the DJ character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, and the notice icon I 6 of the hat it holds is the notice icon first display area YA 1 of the notice icon display area 285. The effect display will be performed. The number of notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in the increase effect of the advance notice icon by one DJ character BY. In this manner, a plurality of types of increase effects of the advance notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first advance notice icon increase effect by the character YM of the lord and a second advance icon increase effect by the character BY of the DJ). By configuring, there are cases where it is possible to diversify the effects and enhance the effects.

  FIGS. 25 (8k) to (9k) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 25 (8 k) It is shown that the character BY appears on the flying carpet and emerges from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 25 (8k), the character of DJ appears with the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (9 k), the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM of the lady is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character is While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icons I 9 of the one thousand boxes are placed in the notice icon second display area YA 2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k ′), the DJ character passes the back side of the notice icon by arranging it on a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as it is. In addition, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k ′ ′), the character BY of the DJ is a thousand-piece box so that it is superimposed on the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display may be performed in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1. That is, the overwrite effect of the advance notice icon may be performed. As described above, the execution times of the additional effects of the plurality of types of advance notice icons may overlap, and in some cases, the effect can be further enhanced.

  FIG. 25 (12 l) shows another example of the effects shown in FIG. 19 (12). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 25 (12 l), the letter notations respectively corresponding to the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed together. For example, the letter of "continuation" is additionally displayed on the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon I9 of the two-piece box displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. The word “promotion” is displayed as a note on the screen, and the word “blessing” is shown as a note on the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed on the notice icon third display area YA3. In the notice icon I7 of the Shuriken displayed in the area YA4, the letter "Chan eyes" is additionally displayed, and in the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5, "Steachen" is displayed. In the notice icon I6 of the hat that the text is displayed as a note and displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, the question The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the content of the notice effect for which the execution is predicted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 25 (12l ') and the same figure (12l' '), a part or all of the characters additionally displayed on the notice icon are set as "question marks" to clarify the corresponding notice effects. It may not be displayed on the screen. This makes it possible to give expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is to be executed, which may improve interest.

  Further, it may be possible to give notice that the effect display in which the big hit is decided is executed by the combination of a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of the notice icons displayed, for example, FIG. As shown in (12l ′ ′ ′), when three hat notification icons I6 with the word “continuation” attached are displayed in the three notification icon display area 285, four times of the simulation in which the big hit is determined It may be notified that effect display including a series of effects will be performed. If the letter added to the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, if the letter “promotion” is added to the notice icon I6 of the hat), the notice icon I6 of the hat The result of the symbol variation display at the time of being digested may be a premier notice display that gives notice that the result is a big hit (or that there is a big hit in the hold).

  In the example of presentation described above, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of the character BY of the character YM or DJ of the lord, but in the example of presentation shown in FIG. 26, the effect of increasing the notice icon by display of the decorative symbol is displayed. It is something to do.

  In FIG. 26 (A1), the decorative symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and reach effect is started. This reach effect is, for example, a normal reach.

  After the reach effect is started, the notice icon symbol imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (A2). In the example shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the notice icon icon of the hat imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat is stopped and displayed. In the vicinity of the lower part of the notice icon symbol of this hat, the wording of "stock" is appended, and the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, thereby notifying that the notice icon is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285. doing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (A3), a display for changing the notice icon icon of the hat to the notice icon I6 of the hat and moving to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed. As shown in (A4), the decoration symbol of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that it is a display result of detachment. In this embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon may be performed in this manner.

  In FIG. 26 (B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the decorative symbol of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c respectively, and the reach state is formed , Production of normal reach is started.

  After the reach effect is started, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B2), in the middle symbol display area 208b, the first notice icon pattern simulating the first notice icon I1 of the first hall is stopped and displayed. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the letter notation of "stock" is added to the first notice icon pattern of the first lady, and the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, whereby the notice icon display area In 285, it is notified that the notice icon is displayed in an increased number.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the display for changing the notice icon symbol of the first hallmark to the notice icon I1 of the first hall and moving to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 Is performed, and as shown in FIG. 26 (B4), the decoration symbol of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the display result is "off". At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lady has changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. It goes without saying that the notice icon after the change is not limited to the notice icon I6 of the hat, but may be another kind of notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period during which the symbol variation display is being executed, for example, the notice icon may change during the execution of the symbol variation display after the next time, or the notice You may make it not change until the timing which an icon digests. In this embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon may be performed in this manner.

  Next, another example of effect of the above-described advance notice icon digesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 27 to 30 are diagrams showing step by step another presentation example of the advance notice icon digested presentation. In FIGS. 27 to 30, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  Fig. 27 (38m) to Fig. (40m-3) show another example of the effects shown in Fig. 21 (38) to Fig. (40). In FIG. 27 (38 m) to FIG. (39 m), the same effect as in FIG. 21 (38) to FIG. (39) is performed, but in FIG. 27 (40 m-1), the middle symbol display area 208 b is slow The variable display appears and the pseudo run symbol appears, but then, as shown in FIG. 27 (40 m-2), the variable display becomes high-speed just before the pseudo run symbol becomes the stop display position of the decoration symbol, and the pseudo run symbol Is scrolled out below the display area, and as shown in FIG. 27 (40 m-3), the display of temporary stop is displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 2” and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed. The stop display is notified that the result is out. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, there may be a case where the pseudo-series effect is not performed.

  FIGS. 27 (23n)-(24n) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 20 (23)-(24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (23 n), the display in which the hat notification icon I 6 is digested is started, but as shown in FIG. 27 (24 n), the digested hat notification icon I 6 is enlarged and displayed. Alternatively, the display may be erased as it is, and it may be notified that the digested effect is not performed.

  FIGS. 27 (23o) to (24o-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (23o), the display in which the hat notification icon I6 is digested is started, and the hat notification icon I6 is enlarged at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (24o-1). As shown in FIG. 27 (24o-2), the combination of the decorative symbols of the outset (FIG. 27 (24o-2) indicates that “decoration 1—decoration 2” as shown in FIG. 27 (24o-2). -Display of temporary stop display by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2" and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed, and then stop display and it is informed that it is the result of out. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, there may be a case where the pseudo-series effect is not performed.

  FIGS. 27 (22p)-(23p) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 20 (22)-(23). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the leftmost side (notice icon of FIG. 27 (23p) An effect may be performed in which the notice icon other than the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the first display area YA1) is digested. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 27 (23p), an effect is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the one-man box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested. Thus, in the present embodiment, there may be cases where the advance notice icon is not digested in order from the left. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the stocked order), but the notice icons stored later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, when the notice icon stocked later is digested first, it may be easy to be a big hit, or conversely, it may be hard to be a big hit. In addition, regardless of the order of stock, the digest order of the notice icons may be determined. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may not be affected, and the digest order of the notice icons changes depending on the digest order of the notice icons. You may do it. Further, it may be possible to give notice that the big hit will be decided by digesting a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a specific order, for example, a notice icon I6 of a hat, a shuriken A rule may be set in which the big hit is determined when the notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are digested in this order. As a result, an incentive for the player to find the rule of the digest order of the notice icon to be a big hit works, and the player's motivation may be improved.

  FIG. 27 (24q-1) to FIG. 27 (24q-2) show another example of effects of the effect shown in FIG. 20 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-1), the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed. After the vacancy occurs, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are respectively moved to the left side You may At this time, for example, a moving animation may be performed to move the display position of the advance notice icon to the left, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing at which the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is changed may be simultaneous with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. It may be after the digest presentation of the advance notice icon is started, or after the finish production of the advance notice icon is ended.

  FIGS. 28 (Aa) to 28 (Ae) show examples of effects when an increase effect of the advance notice icon is performed after the advance effect of the advance notice icon is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (Aa), after the notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed. At the timing indicated by 28 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and it is informed that the display result is out. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ac), after the suspension is digested and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ad), the increase effect of the notice icon by the character YM of the lord is line When the notice icon I9 of the one-and-two box is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ae), the notice icon No. 3 becomes blank because the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested. A notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown into the display area YA3 is displayed. As described above, a notice icon may be displayed to be displayed in the notice icon display area that has become blank as the notice icon is digested.

  FIG. 28B shows an example of effect in the case where the notice icon is increased after a plurality of blank spaces are generated in the notice icon display area in response to the plurality of notice icons being digested. That is, as shown in FIG. 28B, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested, and then the character YM of the tousame character is displayed. When the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Among them, it is displayed in order from the left side. In this way, display may be performed to increase the notice icon. In the case where there are a plurality of blank spaces in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icons is not limited to that described above, and may be another order. It may be preset in 400. Moreover, in this example of presentation, depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, the reliability of the big hit and the number of the notice icons displayed are not changed, but depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of displayed advance notice icons are different. For example, when the notice icon increasing in the notice icon sixth display area YA6 on the right side among the display areas which are blank in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, at least six notice icons are notice icons. It may indicate that it is displayed in the display area 285, and may also indicate that the jackpot reliability is the highest.

  FIG. 28 (C) shows an example of effect in the case where the digestion effect of the advance notice icon and the increase effect of the advance notice icon are performed during the execution of one time of symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 28C, while the effect of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, An increase is produced for the notice icon by the character YM, and it is displayed that the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. Here, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon increased in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display is performed. In this manner, the staging effect of the advance notice icon and the increase effect of the advance notice icon may be performed during the execution of one pattern variation display. At this time, there may be a case in which the period in which the preliminary effect icon is performed and the period in which the preliminary effect icon is performed overlap with each other. In addition, the increase effect of the notice icon may be started after the end effect of the notice icon is started, or the end effect of the notice icon may be started after the increase effect of the notice icon is started, or the notice icon The staging effect and the increasing effect of the advance notice icon may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area which is blank at the start of the symbol change display, or after the symbol change display is started, the increase effect of the notice icon is displayed. It may be an area scheduled to be blank before being started.

  FIG. 28 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 23 (59). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 28 (59r), the effect of asking whether or not the notice icon is digested is performed before the digesting effect of the notice icon is started. Specifically, for example, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether the notice icon that is the target of digestion starts to fluctuate or not, and whether the notice icon is digested or not I am trying to scold me. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23 (60), the fan notification icon I10 may be digested, or the fan notification icon I10 may not be digested. If not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the display of the notice icon may be maintained and the digest of the notice icon may be suspended. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 28 (59r), when the notice icon I10 of the fan is erased without being digested, the stop display is then performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the off, and the display result of the off is displayed. You may alert that.

  FIGS. 28 (59 s)-(60 s) show other effects of the effects shown in FIGS. 23 (59)-(60). That is, in FIG. 28 (59s), in the notice icon display area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a box of notice icons I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed. Of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 after the swing fluctuation starts with the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1". If I10 is digested, it will be a notice that it will be a big hit, and as shown in Figure 28 (60s), if another notice icon (for example, a hat notice icon I6) is digested, it will be left as it is It may be notified that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of.

  FIGS. 28 (23t) to (32t) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to 21 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (23t), in this example of presentation, in the notice icon display area 285, an in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 for displaying a digested notice icon is added. As shown in FIG. 28 (23t) to FIG. 28 (25t), when the staging effect of the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is started. Is displayed in the digest notification icon display area YA0. The notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is continuously displayed after being digested as shown in FIG. 28 (28 t) to FIG. It will continue to be displayed until the end of). The timing at which the display of the notice icon in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is started may be after the start of the preparation of the notice icon, or even before the start of the preparation of the notice icon. It may be simultaneous with the start of the digest presentation of the advance notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the digest notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted may be after the end of the end effect of the notice icon, or even before the end of the end effect of the notice icon. It may be good, it may be simultaneous with the end of the digestion production of a notice icon, may be after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon started, or after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon finished It may be, may be simultaneous with the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, may be before the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is started, or may be It may be simultaneous with the end of the corresponding effect, or it may be deleted at the end of symbol variation where the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special figure) or during digestion The notification icon display area YA0 is erased (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 are erased in FIG. 22 (44), or only the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 is erased Etc.). When a plurality of notice icons are digested during one pattern change display, the notice icon a in the notice icon display area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A which is first digested is a digest of the notice icon A. It may be erased after the end of the rendering or with the end, and there may be no preview icon displayed in the digest preview icon display area YA0, or the digest rendering of the preview icon B to be digested next is started It may be erased after being displayed simultaneously or when it is displayed, or it may be erased after it is displayed simultaneously with or when it is displayed. For example, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or the notice icon A and the notice At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, super reach effect or big hit effect, simultaneous effect on islands, etc.) is performed, only the notice icon display area 285 is deleted, and a notice is given during digestion The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be erased and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the area 285 and the during-digestion advance notice icon display area YA0 may be erased.

  FIGS. 29A to 29A show an example of effects in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are simultaneously digested. That is, in FIG. 29 (Aa), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3. The ribbon preview icon I8 is displayed, and the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in the fourth preview area YA4. Then, among these notice icons, the notice icons of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are respectively digested The production is started. Here, the start timings of the digest and presentation of each advance notice icon may be simultaneous or different. In this case, the digest order of the advance notice icons may be set to correspond to the execution order of the effects.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. . Specifically, the character display of "CONTINUED" is additionally displayed near the lower part of the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, and the character display of "STECHEN" is added near the lower part of the notification icon I8 of the enlarged ribbon. Is displayed.
Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, stage change presentation is started in response to the consumption of the notice icon I8 on the ribbon. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ac), after the closing of the shoji character and the character CH of Princess Chibi appear on the front side, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ad), the shoji opens and the moon The display of the background (moon surface background) showing how the space is viewed from the surface is started. In addition, during the execution of stage change effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 Move to and zoom out.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ae), the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display area, and then the character BC of the bancho corresponding to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat. Appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and effects are displayed to push up the stopped right symbol, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the pseudo connected effect will be executed thereafter. .

  In this example of presentation, a plurality of effects corresponding to the digested advance notice icon are different in start timing, but may be simultaneously started.

  FIGS. 29 (66 u-1) to (66 u-3) show other examples of effects of the effects shown in FIG. 23 (66). That is, in FIG. 29 (66u-1), the stop display is performed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", and it is notified that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed. It has been shown that there is a warning icon that has been and yet has not been digested. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (66 u-2), after the jackpot start staging is performed, as shown in FIG. 29 (66 u-3), even after the round game of the big hit is started, undigested continues The notice icon is displayed. In the example of the effect, the advance notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area during execution of the big hit game, but may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undivided notice icon may be used, for example, as a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, a effect for notifying that it is a probability change big hit decision, etc.), for example, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in -3), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during execution of the big hit game, a notification that it is a definite variation big hit decision is given, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested May be notified that it is a 15R big hit decision. In addition, when other advance notice icons are digested, for example, it may be made to have a meaning indicating that there is a possibility of promotion. As described above, even if the same advance notice icon is digested during the execution of the big hit game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the big hit game may be different from the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display. That is, you may prepare a notice icon specific to a big hit. Also, the notice icon displayed during the big hit game may be the same as the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display, or only some notice icons may be used in common. .

  FIG. 29 (Ba) to FIG. 29 (Bc) show display examples before and after stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ba), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and then the retention is digested and the symbol changes When the display is started, stage change presentation is started as shown in FIG. 29 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, when the stage change effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 29 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, although the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, all notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be erased when the stage change is performed. It should be noted that after the stage change is performed, the notice icon may be deleted without fail, only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or even if it is not deleted. Good.

  Fig. 29 (22 v-1) to Fig. 23 (23 v) show another example of effects of the effects shown in Fig. 20 (22) to Fig. (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22 v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 29 (22 v-2), the character YM2 with the placard appears and is digested The type of notice icon is notified in advance. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (23 v), the digest presentation of the notice icon is started, in which the notice icon of the type notified in advance (the notice icon I6 of the hat) is digested. In addition, even if advance notification of the type of notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, and a notice icon of a type different from the notice icon notified in advance is digested. It may be done. If a notice icon of a type different from the notice icon notified in advance is digested, it may indicate that the jackpot is highly reliable.

  FIG. 29 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22 w), after the symbol variation display is started, the player is made to pay attention to the digestion of the notice icon by highlighting the notice icon which may be digested or the like. It is also good.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, by digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character Banccho BC appears and the pseudo-series effect is executed, and the other effect is not executed. The effect corresponding to is performed, and other effects are not performed, for example, the character BC of the leader does not appear although the preliminary icon I6 of the hat is digested, and the character of the princess appears The jackpot may be determined in such a manner that the jackpot is determined when the effect not corresponding to the digested advance notice icon is executed (so-called, the rule collapse) such that the jackpot is settled by the jackpot.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the notice icon to be digested is determined and can not be selected by the player, but for example, the notice icon to be digested is operated by operating the effect button 136 or the like. It may be selectable.

  Also, if a big hit occurs while the previous notice icon is displayed in the previous notice icon display area 285, it is erased when the big hit game is started, and the previous notice icon is carried over when transitioning to a definite change state or time saving state. It may be configured not to be. Also, when a big hit occurs while the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, once the big hit game is started, it is temporarily not displayed, and is displayed again after the definite change state or the time saving state is finished. It may be configured as follows. In addition, it may be configured not to carry over even after the definite change state or the short time state ends.

  Next, a rendering example will be described in which the content of reach rendering to be shifted thereafter is previewed according to the type of preview icon to be digested.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Aa), when "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, then, as shown in FIG. It appears, and then it shifts to the reach of the leader corresponding to the character that has appeared. Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-2), when the one-two box notice icon I 9 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. It appears, and then, it shifts to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-3), when the fan notice icon I10 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-3), the enlarged character HM of the princess is displayed. It appears and then transitions to Princess Reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. In addition, in this production example, it corresponds to the reliability of the big hit that the notice icon means, and the reliability of the big hit of these reach production is constituted in order of princess reach> toll you reach> bancho reach There is. It should be noted that if a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a so-called character of enlarged display appears after the notice icon I6 of the hat has been digested) (a so-called law break has occurred) May be configured to determine a big hit. In addition, a plurality of preview icons may be combined and digested, and a plurality of characters may be displayed corresponding to the plurality of preview icons to be executed. In addition, a unique effect (digestion-specific effect) for digesting a plurality of preview icons may be executed, and it is a big hit if the plurality of preview icons are digested rather than the single preview icon is digested. May be configured to be highly reliable.

  Next, a button effect to be executed after the second button preview icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Ba), the second button preview icon I11 is displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 of the preview icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, FIG. At the timing shown in (Bb), the display in which the second button preview icon I11 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the second button preview icon I11 displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 is moved from the preview icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button preview icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter as shown in FIG. 30 (Bc). It informs that it is possible to accept the operation, and promotes the player to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another rendering example of the button rendering performed after the second button preview icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Ca), in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, a second button notice icon I11 is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described button reach effect is performed, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (Cb), the display in which the second button preview icon I11 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the second button preview icon I11 displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 is moved from the preview icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button preview icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps with the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is shown in FIG. As a result, the effect button 136 changes to a protruding button image 136b that is displayed in a protruding manner. That is, it is shown that the jackpot has been promoted to a higher button reach effect.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a view showing stepwise an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 32 shows a stage following the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 33 is a view showing in a step-by-step manner the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 32, and FIG. 34 is a view showing in a stepwise manner the continuation of an example of effect shown in FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 34 step by step.

  In FIGS. 31 (1) to 32 (14), the notice icon used in the increase effect of the notice icon is the notice icon I6 of the hat changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lady. Since this embodiment is the same as FIGS. 19 (1) to 20 (14) except for the points, the explanation here is omitted. Further, with regard to the effects performed between FIG. 32 (14) and FIG. 32 (20), all of the notice icons used in the increase effect of the notice icon have been changed to the notice icon I1 of the first statuette. Except for FIG. 20 (15) to FIG. 20 (19).

  In FIG. 32 (20), the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the result of the detachment is definitively displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  And in FIG. 32 (21), the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and furthermore, the fourth symbol is turned off, but the pending icon and the decorative symbol have not changed yet.

  In FIG. 32 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is moved and displayed by movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and changes to the fluctuation icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 32 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display in which the first icon of the first president's announcement is digested is started. That is, display is performed such that the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 (23), for example, when a plurality of the same notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, four first notice icons I1 are displayed. Although it is preset to preferentially digest the notice icons displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icons. Further, which notice icon is to be used may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the right may be preferentially digested. That is, the order of digesting the advance notice icon is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the first hallmark notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a hat notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown at 32 (25), below the notice icon I 6 of the hat displayed in an enlarged manner, a character display of “continuation” is displayed as a notice of anticipation that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed. In addition, this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or is performed after the enlarged display. It is also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the character display of "CONTINUED" attached to the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased at the timing shown in FIG. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Thus, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be redisplayed at the original position. Note that when the digested notice icon is redisplayed at the original position, it may be displayed so as to be recognizable, for example, the display area in which the digested notice icon is displayed. It may be grayed out, or text information "Done" may be added. Alternatively, after the digested notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it may be deleted.

  After that, as for the effect contents shown in FIG. 32 (27) to FIG. 33 (33), the digested hat announcement icon I 6 is displayed in the announcement icon first display area YA 1, and the announcement icon second display area YA 2-announcement icon Since it is the same as FIGS. 20 (27) to 21 (33) except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the first notice icon I1 of the first lady, Description of is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (34), the display in which the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is moved from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first hallmark notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a hat notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown at 33 (36), below the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in an enlarged manner, a character display of "CONTINUED" is displayed as a notice of anticipation that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the character display of "CONTINUED" attached to the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased at the timing shown in FIG. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, to the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, as for the effect contents shown in FIG. 33 (38) to FIG. (45), the notice icon I 6 of the hat having been digested is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA 1 and the notice icon second display area YA 2 respectively. 21 (38) to 22 (except that the notice icons displayed in the icon third display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are all changed to the first notice icon I1 of the first lady. This is the same as 45), so the description here is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (46), the display in which the notice icon I1 of the first statue of honor displayed on the notice icon third display area YA3 is started is started. That is, display is performed such that the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is moved from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first hallmark notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the one-by-two box notice icon I9 and is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Above the displayed notice icons I9 of the two-tiered box, a letter display of "promotion" is displayed as a notice of anticipating the transition to the rendering with a higher degree of reliability. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the one-two box advance notice icon I9 is displayed enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or is performed after the enlarged display. It is also good.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character display of "promotion" attached to the notice icon I9 of the one and two boxes is deleted, and the notice icon I9 of one and the two boxes is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. Then, the display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, to the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (49), the above-described reach transition effect is started. In the present rendering example, when the reach transition rendering is started, as shown in FIG. 34 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the rendering display such that a power failure has occurred is performed, the strong reach with high reliability is achieved. The production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach effect in the present example is started, as shown in FIG. 33 (50-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character display "is a chance" on the darkened background At the timing shown in FIG. 34 (50-2), character display "NO" is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34 (51), after the character display of “Is it too hot?” Is performed, character display of “No” is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (52). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34 (53), the character display of "one blow" is performed to notify that the button effect is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 is possible, to the player The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (55), as shown in FIG. 34 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is erased. It is shown that the button reach production has failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 34 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 1".

  In FIG. 34 (58), everything including the advance notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. In the meantime, in FIG. 34 (59), the swing fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  After that, for example, when 2 seconds have passed since the temporary symbol stop display, the display shown in FIG. 34 (60) is a display in which the notice icon I1 of the first condolence icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is digested. It is started. That is, display is performed in which the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first hallmark notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a fan notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (61) and is enlarged. At this time, for example, below the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in an enlarged manner, a letter display of "blessing" may be added to notify that the big hit is determined. In addition, in the case of appending the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I10 of the fan is enlarged, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after being enlarged.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the notice icon I10 of the fan is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 35 (62), the original display position, ie, the notice icon fourth display area of the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. A display for moving to YA4 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (63), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols that were fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed and re-variation effect is started . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 35 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed in reduced size. Ru.

  Soon, as shown in FIG. 35 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed.

  And in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown in FIG. 35 (66), the combination of the decoration symbols of the big hit decision of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first special view display device 212, the "special view A", which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth pattern display device 284a, the fourth pattern (round figure) of the special view 1 Is on. Thereafter, although not shown, a big hit game is started after the above-mentioned big hit game start effect is executed.

  Next, another example of the effect of the above-described advance notice icon increase effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. Here, FIG. 36 to FIG. 38 are diagrams showing in stages the other effect examples of the increase effect of the advance notice icon. In FIGS. 36 to 38, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIGS. 36 (8a) to (9a) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8a), an effect display is performed in which the third hallmark notice icon I3 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the first hallmark notice icon I1. In addition, it can carry out similarly about the preliminary announcement icon I2 of a 2nd lord. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (9 a), the thrown third grandchild's preview icon I 3 is displayed in the preview icon first display area YA 1 of the preview icon display area 285.

  FIGS. 36 (8b) to (9b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8b), as in FIG. 31 (8), an effect display is performed in which the first condolence's preview icon I1 is thrown toward the preview icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 36 (9b), it is shown that the first condolence's notice icon I1 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to carry out the case increase effect using the notice icon of the lord.

  FIGS. 36 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8c), there is performed an effect display in which not only one notice icon I1 of the first hallmark but also the three first hallmark notice icons I1 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 simultaneously. ing. In addition, it may not be simultaneous but it may be an effect display in which one by one is thrown sequentially.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (9c), the three first dunning notice icons I1 being thrown are the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon They are respectively displayed in the third display area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to execute the increase of the plurality of advance notice icons in one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at one time, the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notice may be improved, and the effect of presentation may be enhanced. In addition, a highly reliable advance notice icon (for example, the notice icon I3 of the third hallmark) is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (it is difficult to be stocked), and a notice icon of low reliability (for example, first hallmark manner The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (is likely to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285 or vice versa. In this example of presentation, the same notice icon (the first notice icon I1 of the first temple) is increased by three, but a plurality of notice icons with different degrees of reliability may be simultaneously increased, for example, Alternatively, the first toll notice icon I1 and the third toll notice icon I3 may be simultaneously increased.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (9c '), a part or all of the three first hallmark notice icons I1 that have been thrown do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol is displayed. It is also possible to execute the partial gasse increase effect or the entire gasse increase effect in which the frame is out from the left of the display area of the display device 208.

  FIG. 36 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8). That is, in FIG. 36 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode (the display mode by the character of Sabohani) of the pre-reading notice, the character YM of the lady liker notices the first notice icon I1 of the first lord. An effect display for throwing toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the increase presentation of the notice icon even during the execution of the advance notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase presentation of the advance notice icon and the advance notice by the hold icon may not be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 36 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8). That is, in FIG. 36 (8 f), the display of the number of reservations is performed by the presentation suspension lamp 286 without displaying the variation icon display area 280 and the suspension icon display area 281 of the special view 1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 36 (8f), for the convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 which is the target of pre-reading is hatched and shown, but in fact, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similar to the hold lamp of, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 is turned on by the default light emission mode.

  FIGS. 36 (8g) to (9g-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8 g), as in FIG. 31 (8), the effect display is performed in which the first condolence's preview icon I1 is thrown toward the preview icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 36 (9g-1), it is shown that the first announcement icon I1 does not reach the announcement icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (9g-2), the first hallmark notice icon I1 acts on the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1, and the advance notice The effect display (hold change effect) is changed to the display mode of. That is, in the present embodiment, the first hallmark notice icon I1 may not be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 as a notice icon, and may appear as a trigger of the start of the advance notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the on-hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the first tonosama's notice icon I1. For example, the on-hold change effect is less likely to be executed as the notice icon having a higher jackpot reliability. Good.

  FIG. 36 (12h-1) to FIG. 36 (12h-2) show another example of the effects shown in FIG. 31 (12). That is, in FIG. 36 (12 h-1), as in FIG. 31 (12), the decorative symbol is displayed in a state where the first hallmark notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The variable display of is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (12h-2), the decoration symbols of “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and reach effect is started. Ru. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be performed even in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed. In addition, as a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the end of the big hit.

  FIGS. 37 (8i)-(9i) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8)-(9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8i), unlike FIG. 31 (8). It is shown that the character BY of the DJ having the notice icon, not the character YM of the lord, appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8i), the character BY of DJ appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (9i), while the DJ character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first hallmark notice icon I1 held by the first hallmark icon of the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. An effect display to be placed in the display area YA1 is performed. The number of notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in the increase effect of the advance notice icon by one DJ character BY. In this manner, a plurality of types of increase effects of the advance notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first advance notice icon increase effect by the character YM of the lord and a second advance icon increase effect by the character BY of the DJ). By configuring, there are cases where it is possible to diversify the effects and enhance the effects.

  FIGS. 37 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8j) It is shown that the character BY appears on the flying carpet and emerges from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8j), the character BY of DJ appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (9j), the first condolence notice icon I1 thrown by the domino character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 and While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the effect display is performed in which the first hallmark icon I1 held by the character BY is placed in the second notice area YA2 of the second notice icon display area 285. The DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 37 (9 j ′), the rear side of the notice icon is displayed by arranging the DJ character BY in a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. You may display as passing.

  FIGS. 37 (8k)-(9k) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8)-(9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8 k) It is shown that the character BY appears on the flying carpet and emerges from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third hallmark notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (9 k), after the first condolences notice icon I1 thrown by the domino character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first icon of the foremost icon displayed on the announcement icon first display area YA1 being thrown by the foreword's character YM while having the third icon of foretelling icon I3 possessed by the character BY The effect display is performed in which the character BY of the DJ places the preview icon I3 of the third lord in the preview icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the preview icon I1. That is, an effect of promoting the game may be performed by overwriting the low-reliability notice icon of the big hit on the high-reliability notice icon of the big hit. As described above, the execution times of the additional effects of the plurality of types of advance notice icons may overlap, and in some cases, the effect can be further enhanced. In addition, this promotion effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, and may be performed by the symbol variation display of multiple times. Further, the promotion effect may be performed each time the pseudo-series effect is performed.

  FIG. 37 (12 l) shows another example of the effects shown in FIG. 31 (12). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 37 (12 l), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed with the letter notation of “question mark” attached thereto. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first hallmark is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second hallmark is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area The first hallmark notice icon I1 is displayed on YA3, the second hallmark notice icon I2 is displayed on the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and the third hallmark icon is displayed on the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 is displayed, and the notice icon I1 of the first temple is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and the letter notation of "question mark" is added thereto. According to this presentation example, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation to the notice icon after change.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (121 '), the type of the notice icon after change may be notified by a letter notation for the notice icon before the change. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first statue displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second statue displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth The second hallmark notice icon I2 displayed in the display area YA4 has the text of “question mark” appended and can not recognize the notice icon after change, but the notice icon third display area The notice of “Chan eyes” is added to the notice icon I1 of the first tonome displayed on YA3 to be notified that it changes to the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, and displayed on the notice icon fifth display area YA5 In the notice icon I3 of the third tonnage being held, the wording “continuation” is appended and it is notified that it will be changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. The notice of the first condolence icon I1 displayed in the icon sixth display area YA6 is appended with the text of “question mark” together with “continuation” and it is notified that it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat There is. These letter notations may be notified at once for all or part of the notice icons, or may be notified gradually over time.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 37 (12 l ′ ′), all or part of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed to notice icons after change, and the notice icons after change are displayed. The corresponding letter notation may be added only for things.

  FIGS. 38 (8m-1) to (9m) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 31 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 38 (8 m-1), the notice icon is further held. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8 m−2), after the first condolence notice icon I1 thrown by the domino character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 38 (9 m), while the DJ character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I9 of the one thousand boxes possessed is thrown by the character YM of the lord, and the notice icon first display area An effect display is performed in which the character BY of the DJ places the notice icon I9 of the one-man box in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1 of the first statue displayed on YA1. According to this presentation example, the notice icon before the change may be overwritten on the notice icon after the change. As described above, the execution times of the additional effects of the plurality of types of advance notice icons may overlap, and in some cases, the effect can be further enhanced. In addition, this overwrite production may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, and may be performed by multiple times of symbol variation display. Also, the overwrite effect may be performed each time the pseudo-series effect is performed.

  FIGS. 38 (8n-1) to (9n) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 38 (8n-1), the notice icon is further held. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8n-1), the character BY of DJ appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8n-2), the notice icon I9 of the box of one thousand boxes thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in 9n), while the DJ character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first icon of the first hallmark icon I1 possessed is thrown by the character YM of the hallmark and the first icon area of the notice icon An effect display is performed in which the character BY of the DJ places the first condolence's preview icon I1 in the preview icon first display area YA1 in such a manner as to overlap the preview icon I9 of the one thousand box displayed on YA1. In this way, the notice icon after the change may be overwritten on the notice icon before the change. As described above, the execution times of the additional effects of the plurality of types of advance notice icons may overlap, and in some cases, the effect can be further enhanced. In addition, this overwrite production may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, and may be performed by multiple times of symbol variation display. Also, the overwrite effect may be performed each time the pseudo-series effect is performed. Also, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lady) is digested, the notice icon after the change is the notice icon before overwriting (for example, the notice icon I9 of the first and second boxes) May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured that the reliability of the jackpot may be higher if digesting the notification icon after overwriting rather than the warning icon before overwriting is digested, or the reliability of the jackpot is configured to be lower. It may be configured such that the jackpot reliability does not change.

  Next, an example of effect in which the advance notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 39 is a view showing the effect example in which the notice icon changes in stages. In FIG. 39, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the general view display 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is performed. Then, two pending icons (pending icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and it is shown that the start of two symbol variations is pending ing. Note that these two hold icons are both in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is a target of pre-reading and hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold The aspect is the same. In addition, the first icon of the first on the notice icon I1 is displayed in the first notice area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and in the second notice area of the notice icon YA2, the third notice icon I3 of the third onus. Is displayed.

  And as shown to FIG. 39 (A), the character YM2 of the statuette with a placard has appeared in the change display of a decorative symbol. In this placard, the wording "change" is attached, and it is predicted that the display mode of either the notice icon or the hold icon changes.

  After that, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, it is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 39 (B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord changes to a notice icon I9 of a box of 1,000. Note that the display mode of the first hallmark's preview icon I1 displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 may be changed, or both of the preview icons may be changed. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 39 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode is the display mode of the prefetch notice. Change to Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, or any display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, and the display mode of the change icon h0 May change. As described above, in the present effect example, as a result of performing a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain effect being performed, the hold is not performed. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the advance notice icon may change due to this effect.

  In addition, as shown in 39 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, although the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, it is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right. Then, two pending icons (pending icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and it is shown that the start of two symbol variations is pending ing. Note that these two hold icons are both in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is a target of pre-reading and hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold The aspect is the same. In addition, the first icon of the first on the notice icon I1 is displayed in the first notice area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and in the second notice area of the notice icon YA2, the third notice icon I3 of the third onus. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a Chibi princess chance effect is performed. Chibi princess chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-described spread map fluctuating game is executed. Chibi Princess Chance production is a production imitating Amida lottery, and the character of Chibi princess chooses one from five starting points, moves along the route of Amida from the selected starting point, and reaches the goal point It is to predict that an effect corresponding to the indicated icon is to be executed. For example, when the character of Princess Chibi reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, it predicts that the wing member 2321 of the second special view starting opening 232 will be long open, and the "super hot" If it reaches the goal point where the character notation is shown, it indicates that the result of the symbol variation display being executed is likely to be a big hit, and if it reaches the goal point where the cross icon is shown In advance, it is predicted that the fluctuation display result of the common drawing is out.

  Furthermore, in the present rendering example, when reaching the goal point where the grandchild's preview icon is shown, as shown in FIG. 39 (D1), of the preview icons before the change displayed in the preview icon display area 285. At least one of the changes to the notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39 (D1), the third hallmark notice icon I3 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to a notice box I9 of a one-two box. Note that the display mode of the first hallmark's preview icon I1 displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 may be changed, or both of the preview icons may be changed.

  In addition, when the character of the sabothani reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 39 (D2), at least one of the default icons in the default display mode in the pending icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is displayed. One changes to the display mode of the advance notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the default display mode, is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, or any display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, and the display mode of the change icon h0 May change.

  As described above, in the present effect example, as a result of performing a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain effect being performed, the hold is not performed. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the advance notice icon may change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example in the case of power failure / power recovery while the advance notice icon is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 40 is a view showing in stages the display example in the case of power failure / power recovery while the advance notice icon is being displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 40A, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is performed. Then, two pending icons (pending icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and it is shown that the start of two symbol variations is pending ing. Of the two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a default display. It is an aspect. In the notice icon display area 285 of the notice icon display area 285, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2. The notice icon I9 is displayed, and a notice icon I10 of a fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4.

  In FIG. 40 (B), power interruption occurs for some reason, and FIG. 40 (C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after power recovery immediately. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C), characters are displayed as "returning", "Please wait for a while". At this time, the first special view display device 212 resumes the variable display, and the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The lamp 216 has returned to the state before the power failure. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), the symbol variation display is ended, and the first special view display device 212 stops and displays “special view I” which is a display result of detachment. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol variation display is finished, the display is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7" which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the detachment. Then, when power failure / power recovery is performed, any notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased. Further, when power failure / power recovery is performed, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, also becomes the default display mode. In this embodiment, when power failure / power recovery occurs, the prefetch result information stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “not determined” information. It may be configured to be Here, when there is at least one pending message including "not determined" information in the sub-command including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit, "not determined" information is included. It is possible not to give the advance notice including the end effect and the increase effect of the advance notice icon until all the pending items are consumed. Also, no pre-reading advance notice is given for a newly increased pending after power-off / power recovery (the pre-reading result is saved), and pre-reading advance notice is given after all the pendings containing “not determined” information are digested However, with regard to a newly increased suspension after power failure / power recovery, it may be possible to make a prefetching notice before the suspension including the “not determined” information is digested.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 41 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 41 step by step. In FIGS. 41 to 42, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIG. 41, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold of symbol variation display which is a target of pre-reading, but the display mode is For example, as with the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used.

  FIG. 41 (1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 19 (5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed large in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c at the center of the display screen. This is different from FIG. 19 (5) in that a second decorative symbol display area is formed above the reserved icon display area 281 and the 3-digit second decorative symbol is displayed small. The second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area is configured to continue the variation of any of the symbol patterns of the symbol row until the determination is stopped after the variation starts.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a crown pattern effect starts. Here, unlike the character of FIG. 19 (6), the character of the lord YM has a notice icon I21 of “house” in which the characters “house” are circled.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (3), after the character YM of the majesty moves to the predetermined throwing position, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (4), the notice icon I21 of the "house" possessed is displayed as a notice icon An effect display for throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (5), the to-be-forecasted notice icon I21 of "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter as shown in FIG. On the decorative symbol display device 208, effect display is performed in which the character of the majesty character YM succeeds in displaying the advance notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, by displaying the notice icon I21 of "house" in the notice icon display area 285, it can be at least suggested that a family crest effect described later may be performed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 41 (7) to (8), a display is performed in which the character YM of the crown pattern is framed out below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of off is decided. In addition, the 2nd decoration design is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration design of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. The hold icon displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes a change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is a special view 1 Of the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a crown pattern effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the advance notice icon based on the result of the pre-reading of the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the character of the royal crown YM has a notice icon I22 of "print" in which the characters of "print" are circled.

  Then, after the main character YM is moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (12), the notice icon I22 of the “print” possessed is notified at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (13). An effect display for throwing towards the icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (14), the thrown notice icon I22 of "print" is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. After that, after the same effect display as that of FIG. 41 (6) is performed, the same effect display as that of FIG. 41 (7) to FIG. 41 (8) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of off is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 41 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is moved and displayed by movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 41 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c respectively, and the reach state is formed. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (19) following FIG. 41 (18), the notice icon I21 of the “house” displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon A display in which the notice icon I22 of "print" displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the notice icon I21 of "home" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I22 of "print" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and Display moving to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the notice icon second display area YA2 is performed. The notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "print" are digested. The timing at which the notice icon display area 285 is erased may be deleted when the effect corresponding to the digest of the notice icon is started, or the effect corresponding to the digest of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued after that. In addition, the timing to start moving of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "print" may be simultaneous, or the movement start of notice icon I21 of "house" is notice icon I22 of "print" The movement start of the notice icon I22 of "print" may be earlier than the movement start of the notice icon I21 of "house".

  After that, when the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "print" move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in 21), a family crest 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a family crest on which an effect image to that effect is displayed A fall effect is performed. In addition, at this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (22), it develops into a super reach (a sword reach). In addition, since the presentation content of swordsman reach is as having shown in FIGS. 14-16 and having mentioned above, the description here is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the corresponding notice effect (family crest fall effect) is performed by digesting the two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for “house” and the notice icon I22 for “print”). Is configured. In addition, even if these advance notice icons are digested, there may be cases where the family crest fall effect is not performed, or there may be cases where other effects are performed. Further, when the family crest fall effect is performed, it may be promised to be a big hit in the symbol variation display, or there may be a case of losing. Further, the case in which the family crest fall effect is performed may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the family crest fall effect is not performed. Further, the symbol variation display serving as a big hit may be configured such that the family crest falling effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display serving as a loss. In addition, it is easier for the symbol variation display that is a big hit to be more easily digested by the two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "print") than the symbol change display for losing May be configured.

  FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 are diagrams showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the advance notice icon digestion effect. In FIGS. 43 to 44, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In FIG. 43 (a1), unlike in FIG. 41 (5), the notice icon I22 of "print" appears before the notice icon I21 of "house" and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and then As shown in FIG. 43 (a2), the notice icon I21 of "house" appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a3), it is displayed in the notice icon I22 of "print" and the notice icon second display area YA2 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display in which the notice icon I21 of the "home" being used is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the notice icon I22 of "print" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I21 of "house" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and Display moving to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the advance notice icon second display area YA2 is performed. In addition, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the reach state by "decoration 1" is formed, and the reach production is started.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I22 for "print" and the notice icon I21 for "house" move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a4-1). Ru. At this time, the display order is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order in which the "houses" and "prints" are arranged), not the order in which the "prints" and "houses" are arranged. Further, as shown in FIG. 43 (a4-2), the notice icon I22 of the "print" and the notice icon I21 of the "house" may be enlarged in the arrangement order of the "print" and the "house". In this effect example, even if it is shown in FIG. 43 (a4-1) or in the case shown in FIG. 43 (a4-2), the above-described family crest fall effect is performed thereafter. For example, when the advance notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the arrangement order of the "house" and "print" (ie, the correct arrangement order), the family crest falling effect is performed, and the arrangement order of the "print" and "house" (ie, When the advance notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the incorrect arrangement order, the family crest fall effect may not be performed. In addition, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the arrangement order of "mon" and "house", it is more difficult for the family crest fall presentation to be started than in the case where the advance icons are enlarged and displayed in arrangement of "house" and "mon". May be configured.

  FIG. 43 (b 1) to FIG. 43 (b 6) show another effect form of the family crest fall effect.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (b1), in the state where only the notice icon I21 of "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, "print" It is shown that the user is digested without waiting for the notice icon I22 of the warning icon to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b2), when only the notice icon I21 of "house" is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 43 (b3), The object 224B descends slightly from above the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the front side of a part of the notice icon display area 285 disposed at the top of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, It operates as if it vibrates in the direction (stirring operation). At this time, in the center upper right portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of "in preparation for family crest preparation" is performed indicating that there is a possibility that a family crest fall effect will be performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol table device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (b2), the notice icon I21 of "home" is enlarged and displayed, while the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 And, the hall effect production has been started. At this time, the character YM of the lord has the notice icon I22 of "print". Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b 4), when the character YM of the lady moves to the predetermined throwing position and the notice icon I 22 of “print” is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. The notice icon second display area YA2 is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (b5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the off is decided. In addition, the 2nd decoration design is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration design of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. The notice icon I22 of "print" remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. At this time, the family crest 224B is once retracted to the initial position to make it easy to recognize that the symbol has been determined and stopped, but it is not retracted to the initial position, and the crawling operation is continued. It is also good. On the other hand, the character display of "in preparation for family crest" is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 43 (b6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is moved and displayed by movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the family crest 224B that has been evacuated descends again and restarts the whistle operation. In this effect example, then, for example, when the notice icon I22 of “print” displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest 224B is lowered, as shown in FIG. The family crest falling effect shown in (21) is performed. It should be noted that there may be a case where the family crest falling effect is not performed because the notice icon I22 of "print" is not digested. Further, in FIG. 43 (b2), the notice icon I21 of "house" may be displayed in an enlarged state until the notice icon I22 of "print" displayed later is digested. At that time, the notice icon I22 of "print" may be stocked, but may be digested without being stocked.

  FIG. 43 (c 1) to FIG. 43 (c 2-3) show another example of effects of the advance notice icon digestion effect. In this presentation example, it is shown that a background notice whose background changes is given by digesting the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of "don" in which the characters "don" are circled is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. And the notice icon I32 of "hime", in which the character of "hime" is circled, is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I33 of "爺", in which the character of "爺" is circled, is displayed It is displayed in the icon third display area YA3.

  In FIG. 43 (c2-1), the background display is shown after the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" are digested ing. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are digested, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image in which the face of the eyebrows has been uploaded from the left side of the display screen, and A background display in which the uploaded image and the image in which the face of the princess is uploaded are divided into three equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when all the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "Hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" Is configured to display a background display indicating that is the highest. Also, three preview icons may be digested simultaneously or one by one. Here, when three notice icons are digested one by one, the reliability for the big hit may be made different depending on the order of the notice icons to be digested. "Predictive icon I32> It may be made most reliable if it is digested in the order of" notice "predictive icon I33, but the relationship between the digest order and the reliability against the big hit can be set appropriately .

  Also, in FIG. 43 (c2-2), among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "Hime", and the notice icon I33 of "爺", the notice icon I32 of "hime" and The state of the background display after only the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image in which the princess's face is up from the left side of the display screen, and the face of the wolf A background display in which the uploaded image is bisected is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two notice icons out of three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" are digested, the symbol variation display is performed. The background display is displayed to indicate that the reliability to the jackpot in is relatively high, but the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are digested. Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the notice icon I32 for "Hime" and the notice icon I33 for "爺" among the three notice icons are digested, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The notice icon I31 of "" and the notice icon I32 of "Hime" may be digested, or the notice icon I31 of "To" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" may be digested. Also, the reliability for the big hit may be made different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested, for example, if the notice icon I31 of "Tono" and the notice icon I32 of "Hime" are digested, "Tono" The big hit reliability is higher than when the notice icon I31 for the notice, the notice icon I33 for the "爺", the notice icon I32 for the "hime", and the notice icon I33 for the "爺" are digested, and the notice icon I31 for the "don" And when the notice icon I33 of "爺" is digested, the jackpot may have higher reliability than when the notice icon I32 of "hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" are digested. These can be set as appropriate.

  Further, in FIG. 43 (c2-3), among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "Hime", and the notice icon I33 of "爺", only the notice icon I33 of "爺" It shows the appearance of the background display after digestion of. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-3), when this one notice icon is digested, the background display in which the image with the face of the eyebrows up is displayed on the entire display screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when one of the notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "Hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" is digested, the symbol variation display is performed. The reliability to the jackpot in is configured to display a background indication indicating that it is less reliable than if the two advance notice icons were digested. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I33 of “33” is digested among the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the notice icon I31 of “「 ”is digested and It is good, and the notice icon I32 of "Hime" may be digested. Also, the reliability for the big hit may be made different depending on the notice icon to be digested, for example, when the notice icon I31 of "Tono" is digested, the notice of the notification icon I32 of "Hime" or the notice of "爺" The jackpot confidence is higher than when the icon I33 is digested, and the jackpot confidence is higher than when the "hime" notice icon I32 is digested if the "hime" notice icon I32 is digested. These may be set appropriately, though they may be set as appropriate.

  Moreover, although this example demonstrated about the example in which all the three advance notice icons are displayed, only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability for the big hit may be different depending on the type of the notice icon displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Tono" is displayed, the notice icon I32 of "hime" or "姫" The big hit reliability is higher than when the previous notice icon I33 is displayed, and when the previous notice icon I32 of "Hime" is displayed, the higher hit reliability than when the previous notice icon I33 of "爺" is displayed If the notice icon I31 of "Toen" and the notice icon I32 of "Hime" are displayed, the notice icon I31 of "Toen" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" may be displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I32 of "Hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" are displayed, and the notice icon I31 of "殿" and "爺" are displayed. If the notification icon I33 is displayed, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the notification icon I32 for "Hime" and the notification icon I33 for "爺" are displayed, but these may be set as appropriate. can do.

  Further, in this example of the effect, the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed, but the background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed In some cases, the background display may not change. In this case, it may be notified that the big hit has been decided as a so-called broken law.

  In addition, when displaying three notice icons, one notice icon may be displayed in one symbol change display, or one notice icon may be displayed each time symbol change display is performed. You may In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the order of display.

  Further, in the example of the effect, when the notice icon I31 of "Toen" is digested, the character of Tonosama appears and Toe Reach is started, and when the notice icon I32 of "Hime" is digested, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started, and the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the whale character may appear and the hat reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I33 for "爺" and the notice icon I32 for "姫" are digested, the "爺" character and the princess character appear to start "爺 & princess reach", and the "予 告" notice icon When I31 and "Hime" notice icon I32 are digested, the Tonosama and Hime characters appear and Tono & princess reach is started, and "To" notice icon I31 and "Tsubaki" notice icon When I33 is digested, the character of the lord and the character of the coffin may appear to start the coffin & coffin reach. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of "Toen", the notice icon I32 of "Hime" and the notice icon I33 of "爺" are digested, the character of princess, character of princess and character of princess appear Princess & Princess reach may be started. In this manner, reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested advance notice icon may be performed.

  Moreover, what these alert icons are digested and displayed is not limited to the above-described reach effect or advance notice of background display, and, for example, it is possible to change the effect mode in the big hit game or the mode during symbol variation Other notices (eg, various notices such as a character for increasing a notice icon) may be performed. In addition, the effect that is performed when the advance notice icon is digested is not limited to the effect display, and audio output (for example, music etc.) corresponding to the digested advance notice icon may be performed. An effect may be performed by the corresponding light emission pattern.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, an example in which effects may be produced for each when the notice icon I21 of "house" is digested and when the notice icon I22 of "print" is digested explain.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (d1), the notice icon I21 of "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of "print" I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms a reach state by the "decoration 1", and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (d 2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only the notice icon I 21 of “house” out of the notice icon I 21 of “house” and the notice icon I 22 of Is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (d3), the notice icon I21 of "house" is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of "home" is digested to be changed to the special symbol which is a chance symbol.

  After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in relation to the chance symbol being displayed, or as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2), a family crest with the effect image There may be a case in which a family crest fall effect is made to cause the character 224B to fall. After such an effect is performed, for example, there may be a transition to the above-described sword strike. It is also possible to shift to the sword reach after performing effects to cause the family crest 224B to fall without displaying the effect image, or to bring the sword image to the sword no reach with neither the effect image nor the family crest 224B. You may make it shift. Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-3), normal reach presentation may be started without performing any presentation due to the notice icon I21 of the "house" being digested.

  In addition, it may be made to shift to another super reach (family crest challenge reach) along with the chance symbol being stopped and displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after being stopped and displayed in the combination of "decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1", at the timing shown in Fig. 44 (d4-4) In the decorative symbol display device 208, character display of "family crest challenge" indicating that the family crest challenge has been shifted is performed. In the first decorative symbol, the swing fluctuation is performed while maintaining the combination of “decorative 1-chance symbol-decorative 1” in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 44 (d5-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the character YM of the royal crown pulls the notice icon I22 of the "print" with a rope, The attraction of the icon I22 suggests that the expectation to the big hit is high.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4), when the tomoku character YM succeeds in drawing in the notice icon I22 of "print", as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4), the family crest 224B falls. At the same time, a family crest fall effect is performed in which a predetermined effect image is displayed. That is, it can be said that the warning icon I22 of "print" has been successfully digested. In addition, after the family crest fall effect is performed, for example, it will shift to the sword sword reach described above.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4a), the rope pulled by the character YM may be broken, and the pulling of the notice icon I22 of "print" may fail. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the process may shift to the above-described sword strike. In this case, the reliability with respect to the big hit may be lower than when the pulling-in of the notice icon I22 of "print" is successful. Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4b), if the rope pulled by the character YM is broken and fails to draw the notice icon I22 of “print”, as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of losing may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied to the case where the notice icon I22 of "print" is digested first. In addition, when the notice icon I22 of "print" is digested may be configured to be more likely to cause crest fall effects than when the notice icon I21 of "house" is digested, It may be reversed.

  In addition to the notice icon I21 for "house", the notice icon I22 for "mon", the notice icon I31 for "don", the notice icon I32 for "hime", the notice icon I33 for "爺", and the like. For example, a notice icon of “U”, a notice icon of “鮫”, a notice icon of “old”, a notice icon of “object”, a notice icon of “object”, The notice icon etc. may be prepared. For example, even if it digests the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "鮫", it may be arranged that the fall of the family crest is not performed, and the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "mon" are digested The family crest falling effect may be performed at a lower frequency when the "home" notice icon and the "chow" notice icon are digested than when the game is performed. In addition, a notice icon of "Gaze" or the like may be changed to a notice icon such as "print".

  Further, in the example of the effect described above, one word is formed by two characters of "house" and "print", and the predetermined effect is performed by satisfying the requirement that the word is formed. However, for example, a word composed of three or more characters may be used for this presentation example. For example, a notice icon of "suspicious", a notice icon of "similar", and a notice of "run" When the three icons of the icon are digested, the pseudo-series effect may be performed.

  Further, in this example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "print", for example, when there is only one vacant space in the notice icon display area 285, Alternatively, the notice icon I21 for "house" may be configured not to display any notice icon I22 for "print". In addition, only one of the notice icons of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "print" may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the person who could not be displayed is indicated by the notice icon. The display may be increased when there is a space in the area 285. If there is no space in the notice icon display area 285, the warning icon displayed in the first place may not be digested. Further, even if a space occurs in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon may not be stocked but may be digested as it is.

  In addition, for example, when there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of them is not displayed until the notice icon I21 for the "house" and the notice icon I22 for the "print" are digested, for example, When digesting the preview icon I21, the preview icon I22 of "print" may be digested together, or the preview icon I21 of "house" may be digested.

  FIG. 45 is a view sequentially showing an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. It is a figure which shows a modification in steps. In FIG. 45, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 45 (e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon which is a target of the pre-reading notice, and the display mode thereof is another hold icon (for example, the first It is displayed larger than the hold icon h11), and it is a display mode of the advance notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed in a mode in which the decorative symbol is displayed large in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In addition, the second decorative symbol is displayed small at the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any display area. In this effect example, the second reserved icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, shows that various parts are given, and in FIG. 45 (e1), it is shown in the reserved icon display area 281 The second reserved icon h12 being configured constitutes a first notice part P1. The first preview part P1 is an image imitating a torso portion of a snowman. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e1) shows that the character EC of the vice merchant is in the frame from the left side of the display screen, and the character EC of the vice merchant is the first The second notice parts P2 to be given to the notice parts P1 of are carried. The second preview part P2 is an image imitating the head of a snowman.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e2), the decoration symbol display device 208 shows that the evil merchant character EC attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the crown pattern effect is started. Here, your character YM is in possession of the third preview part P3. The third preview part P3 is an image simulating a bucket to be put on the head of the snowman.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character EC of the evil merchant is framed out, and an eye and a mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, after the domino character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position and displayed, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e4), an effect indication in which the third preview part P3 possessed is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking notice parts constituting the hold icon. Thereafter, the character YM of the lord is framed out in the manner described above with reference to (6) to (8) of FIG.

  FIG. 45 (e6) shows that the display result of losing has been derived, and one of the variable display of the special view 1 being suspended is digested to start the symbol variable display.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chance through-let display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. The channel display area 287 notifies, for example, that the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, or the display mode of the hold icon which is already the display mode of the pre-reading notice is more reliable It notifies that the display mode is changed to a high degree. In addition, the big hit announcement indication in the design fluctuation indication which is under execution is done. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that the advance notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e7), variable display of symbols is started in the chan-throughlet display area 287.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the third preview part P3 is digested. The third notice part P3 moves toward a first holding icon which is a display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen. The character BY of this DJ carries the fourth notice part P4. The fourth notice part P4 is an image imitating a muffler wound around the neck of the snowman.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second imitation of the head constituting the first reserved icon h11 which is the display mode of the snowman. While being put on the upper part of the notice parts P2, and the DJ character BY flying toward the upper left corner of the display screen, the fourth notice parts P4 possessed by the notice icon display area 285 in the notice icon display area 285 [2] The effect display to be placed in the display area YA2 is performed. In the chan-throughlet display area 287, the variation display of the symbol is still performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e10), the display result in which the character of “Get” is displayed together with the fifth notice part P5 is derived in the chan-throughlet display area 287. That is, it is notified that the fifth preview part P5 is displayed. The fifth preview part P5 is an image imitating a pair of twigs that function as arms of a snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first preview part P5 imitates the trunk forming the first reserved icon h11 in the display mode of the snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. As shown in FIG. 45 (e11 '), the first notice icon 1 in the notice icon display area 285 where the third notice icon P3 was once displayed without immediately attaching the fifth notice part P5. It may be displayed (stocked) once in the display area YA1. In this case, the display may not be displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1, and may be displayed in another display area (for example, the notice icon third display area YA3).

  Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 45 (e12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, The display result of is confirmed. In addition, the 2nd decoration design is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration design of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". In this example of presentation, at this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is still displayed, but may be deleted. The fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 45 (e13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is moved and displayed by movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e14-1), the decoration symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the variation icon h0 which is a display mode of the snowman. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wound around the neck of the change icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman, and the change icon h0 of the display mode of the snowman (or the hold icon ) Is completed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the said symbol fluctuation display is high. In addition, when the display mode of the completed snowman is a hold icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading advance notice, and it is informed that the reliability to the big hit in the change is high.

  Further, the fourth notice part P4 is not limited to the normal symbol variation display, and may be attached, for example, when super reach effect is being performed, for example, FIG. 45 (e14-2) As shown in FIG. 45, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth preview part P4 is digested in the sword master reach, and attached to the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the snowman at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e15-2). You may Here, with the transition to the super reach, the fluctuation icon h0 causes the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 to be framed out downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

  In this example, all displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon which is the target of the pre-reading notice, but for example, the indicated notice parts are digested but attachment to the hold icon fails. Display may be performed. In this case, the big hit reliability may be reduced. In addition, when the displayed preview parts are digested, they are attached to the hold icon other than the hold icon which is the target of pre-reading, and function as another pre-reading notice of the hold or attached to the fluctuation icon which is not the target of pre-reading , It may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 46 is a view gradually showing a modified example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, wherein an increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment and FIG. 47 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner the modification of the digestive effect, and FIG. 47 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. In FIGS. 46 to 47, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Also, in FIG. 46, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold that is an object of pre-reading notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used. Moreover, in FIGS. 46-47, the point provided with 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208A as a main display apparatus, and 2nd decorative symbol display apparatus 208B as a sub display apparatus differs from embodiment mentioned above. . The second decorative symbol display device 208B is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower end edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Some overlap on the front side. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the second decorative symbol display device 208A The variable display of the decoration pattern is performed. As shown in FIG. 46A, neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the character YM of the lord appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the token effect is started. Here, the character of the lord YM is in possession of the notice icon I6 of the hat. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display is switched from the background display to the display including the advance notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas of a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. The display area in which the advance notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or five or more. Also, for example, although the maximum number of display areas in which the advance notice icon can be displayed is eight, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas smaller than eight are displayed, the second When a notice icon is displayed in all four display areas displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a display to increase the display area is performed, and further notification is given that stock of the notice icon is possible. Well, for example, the display area may be increased by one each time the display area being displayed is filled with the notice icon, or when the four display areas are filled with the notice icon. May display all the remaining four display areas that were not displayed. Further, when the character of the lord YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the character of the lord YM. Specifically, for example, the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and the four display areas are filled with notice icons. In the case where the hall effect is started, if the hallman character YM possesses one notice icon, the display area is one when the action of the hallman character YM throwing the notice icon is performed. The number may be increased, or all the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. In addition, when the character YM of the majesty has three notice icons, the display area may be increased by three when the character YM of the majesty casts the notice icon. Alternatively, all the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Also, for example, although the maximum number of display areas in which the advance notice icon can be displayed is eight, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas smaller than eight are displayed, the second When a notice icon is displayed in all four display areas displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a notice icon display area (first notice) including four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed The icon display area is reduced and displayed, and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) consisting of four new display areas where the notice icon is not displayed yet is displayed, and this second notice icon is displayed. A notice icon to be newly stocked may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing at which the second preview icon display area is displayed may be the timing at which the first preview icon display area is full, or it may be the timing at which the preview icon is newly stocked. Good. Also, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing super reach effect, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed in a reduced size, or changed to the notice icon display area 285 to display the stock number of notice icons. The notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, it may be possible to give notice of pre-reading by switching from background display to display including the notice icon display area 285A.

  After the character YM of the lady moves to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (3), the notice icon I6 for the hat held by the player at the timing shown in FIG. There is an effect display that throws towards the. In this rendering example, the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM of the royal crown is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the hat advance icon I6 may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. When the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B may not straddle, for example, the first decorative symbol display device After the notice icon displayed on the predetermined warp entrance displayed on 208A appears on the predetermined position of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, it may be displayed on the notice icon display area 285A.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (5), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (6) In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect display is performed in which the character YM of the grandchild has succeeded in displaying the advance notice icon and is happy to have an expression. As a result, by displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285A, it is indicated that there is a possibility that the pseudo-series effect production will be performed in the future. Thereafter, the character YM of the lord is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  In (7) of FIG. 46, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the off is decided. In addition, the 2nd decoration design is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration design of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  After that, as a result of the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first special image 1 variation display, as shown in FIG. 46 (8), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, “decoration 7-decoration 6 -Display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2", and the display result of the off is decided. In addition, the 2nd decoration design is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration design of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued as before, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 46 (9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the reserved icon h11 of the special view 1 is moved by the movement animation. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, when, for example, 4 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. The display in which the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A from the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the hat advance notice icon I6 may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It should be noted that when digesting the advance notice icon, the advance notice icon may be displayed so that the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A do not straddle. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (11), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is moved to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and then enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (12) Be done. The timing at which the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is switched to the background display is shown in FIG. 46 (11), and the digested notice icon shows the first decorative symbol display It may be the timing when it has moved to the center of the device 208A, or it may be the timing when the notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (12) is enlarged.

  In FIG. 47 (13) continued from FIG. 46 (12), a character display of “continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat. The timing to switch from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing when the character display of “continue” is additionally displayed, “ It may be the timing after the character display of “continuation” is additionally displayed, or may be the timing before the character display of “continuation” is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased along with the character display of "CONTINUE" at the timing of FIG. 47 (14). The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative symbol is displayed across two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative symbol is displayed on one display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left pattern, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right pattern. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (16), the enlarged character BC2 of the displayed ban-length appears and is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and then FIG. As shown in (17), in response to the consumption of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display pushes up the right symbol displayed in the stop state. The player is informed that there is a possibility that the pseudo-series effect may be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the bancho character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 47 (16), it may not be necessary to display the character BC2 of the chain-length over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, "displayed across" is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. May be Alternatively, the display may be integrally performed by the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Alternatively, display may be performed to move from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (18), the pseudo-connected symbol is framed in from the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and a display moving at a low speed toward the lower side is performed. At this time, the pseudo run symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A from the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo-connected symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (19). After that, for example, the pseudo connected effect is performed in the above-described manner as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 are diagrams showing gradually another modification example of the increase presentation and the digestion presentation of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 50 shows the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of a digestion production in steps. In FIGS. 48 to 50, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the holding icon which is the target of the pre-reading notice in the holding icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

  In (a1) to (a7-2) of FIG. 48, although it is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 46 to FIG. 47, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be vertically movable. The difference is that when the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be able to overlap with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the change icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a through-throughlet display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and variable display of symbols is performed. The contents displayed in the channel through-let display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 45, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 48 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chan- nellet display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered to overlap substantially the center of the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect image surrounding the periphery of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed to make the second decorative symbol display device 208B stand out. Since the advance notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 48 (a3) is the same as that shown in FIG. 46 (2) and described above, the detailed description will be omitted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (a4), after the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the channel display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, FIG. As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B ascends and returns to the initial position. Incidentally, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a5-1), the variable display of the special view 1 is finished, and the stop display is performed by the combination of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2” which is the result of losing. At this time, although the fluctuation icon h0 is not deleted, it may be deleted at a timing prior to the end of the fluctuation display of Special Figure 1. Also, in FIG. 48 (a5-1), the result of losing is displayed only with the second decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but the first decorative symbol is displayed, and this first decorative symbol is also displayed. The result of the loss may be displayed. In this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be easy to recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable during symbol stop display. In addition, regardless of the symbol stop display and the symbol variation display, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without being interrupted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48 (a5-2), the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised even after the notice icon I6 for the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A. Alternatively, the overlapped state may be maintained on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is maintained in the lowered state until the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A are consumed is ended. It can be set suitably about raising 2 decoration symbol display device 208B. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a5-2), the variable display of the special view 1 is finished, and both of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the result of losing. The stop display is displayed in combination with Here, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 48 (a6-2) shows that two reservations are digested thereafter and symbol variation display which is a target of prefetching is started. Specifically, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and fluctuation of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display is being done.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A is digested, as shown in FIG. 48 (a7-2), the hat notice icon I6 expands. And the second decorative symbol display device 208B is projected to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Further, below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, the character display of "CONTINUED" for giving a notice that the pseudo-series effect is to be performed is from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It is displayed over. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so as to be easily viewed by the player. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may thereafter be lifted and returned to the initial position, or may be maintained in the lowered state until the symbol variation ends.

  In FIG. 48 (b1) to FIG. (B4), in place of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, display of the number of notice icons displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, the lower vicinity position of the decorative symbol display device 208). An example is shown where a device 288 is provided. The notice icon display number display device 288 includes, for example, two 7 segments, and can display the number (stock number) in which the notice icon is displayed.

  Although FIG. 48 (b1) to FIG. 48 (b3) have the same effect contents as FIG. 20 (17) to FIG. 20 (19), in the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example, It is shown that the numerical value changes in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. That is, in FIG. 48 (b1), since only one notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, "01" indicating the number is displayed in the notice icon display number display device 288. There is. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (b2), the character of the hero YM is throwing three notice icons (hat notice icon I6, a box of notice icons I9, a notice icon of a fan I10). Since the warning icon display area 285 is not displayed yet either, the value shown in the warning icon display number display device 288 remains "01". Note that the value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the character YM of the lord casts the notice icons. Also, a number different from the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called display is displayed). Then, when the above-mentioned three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (b3), the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays "04". Be done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48 (b 4), when the hat notice icon I 6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA 1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of warning icons being displayed is reduced by one, the value is updated and "03" is displayed on the warning icon display number display device 288. The timing at which the value of the notice icon display number display device is decreased may be the timing before the digest of the notice icon is performed, or may be simultaneous with the digest of the notice icon, or the notice icon It may be timing after being digested. Note that, as indicated by the broken line, the value is not decreased even if the advance notice icon is digested, and the total number (4 in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do so. In this effect example, the number displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7 segments in the notice icon, but, for example, the operation by the light emitting means such as LED or the moving means such as the effect movable body A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to emit light to a predetermined pattern, a voice, a decorative symbol display device (a decorative symbol display device in which a notice icon display area 285 is displayed, or the like The display number of the advance notice icon may be notified by a decorative symbol display device or the like.

  The effect example shown in FIGS. 49 (c1) to (c9) is one using two display devices (a first decorative symbol display device 208C and a second decorative symbol display device 208D) as in FIGS. 46 to 47. There is a difference, however, in that they use display devices of the same size. In FIG. 49, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 49 (c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold of the symbol variation display which is a target of pre-reading, but it is displayed The mode is, for example, a default display mode as in the case of the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower end edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are It is arrange | positioned so that it may overlap substantially. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the variation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special view 1 second suspension number display H1 and the special view 2 second suspension number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special views 1 and 2 are suspended. “2” and “0” are displayed corresponding to the numbers, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, as shown in FIG. 49 (c1) At the timing shown in, the variation display of the decorative symbol is in progress. In the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the above-mentioned channel display area 287 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. It is shown. In addition, the background display is also displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, background display is performed on the entire two screens.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (c1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the channel display area 287, as shown in FIG. 49 (c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208D is the first decorative symbol. It descends to a position covering the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C on which the background display has been performed is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285B and is derived and displayed on the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the display mode when the notice icon is displayed is changed in the first decorative symbol display device 208C. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, but the size of the symbol decreases and it is displayed only by the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  In FIG. 49 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. . Since the number of reservations is one at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c3), the special view second holding number display H1 displays “1” indicating that.

  FIG. 49 (c4) shows the state when the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested. That is, the warning icon I7 of the shuriken is digested to notify that a chance eye warning is to be made. At this time, the effect display in which the advance notice icon is digested is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  Thereafter, when the variation display of the special view 1 is finished, as shown in FIG. 49 (c5), in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, stopping is performed by the combination of "decoration 7-decor 1-decor 1" which is a result of losing it's shown. However, the combination of the result of this loss is a chance, and it is informed that the symbol variation display which is likely to be a big hit is being suspended. That is, when this chance is displayed, the advance notice is made.

  FIG. 49 (c6) shows the situation when the second hat warning icon I6 is digested after the symbol variation of the special view 1 starts. That is, it is predicted that the second pseudo-announcement will be made. As a result of the second hat icon warning icon I6 being digested, no warning icon is displayed in the warning icon display area 285B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c7), the advance notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D is elevated and returns to the initial position. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (c8), the decorative symbol is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And the second decorative symbol display device 208D is displayed on the entire two screens.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 49 (c9), in response to the digestion of the second hat's notice icon I6, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the stop display The effect display for pushing up the right symbol being performed is performed, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the second pseudo connected effect is started. At this time, the banner character BC is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (c9), when the decorative symbol is displayed large, for example, a large symbol in which the symbol of the numeral and the character image are integrated is displayed, and the notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When the small decorative symbol is displayed, the small symbol consisting only of the numeral symbol is displayed, and the large symbol and the small symbol are displayed in different display modes, but the large symbol and the small symbol are displayed. The display mode may be the same by changing only the size.

  In this example, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable when displaying the notice icon display area 285B, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. Alternatively, both of the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be respectively moved in the direction of separating from each other. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display When the devices 208D are separated, they may be configured to be able to visually recognize the accessories placed on the back side, and further, the accessories may be moved so as to project forward. You may Such a state may be maintained until all the notice icons are digested.

  FIG. 49 (d) shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 49 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208E disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display disposed at the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G disposed on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but have a slightly smaller width. The three decorative symbol display devices may have the same size.

  The variation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across the three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (d), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and in particular, the notice icon second display area YA2. The hat notification icon I6 displayed on the screen is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208F to the first decorative symbol display device 208E. Further, a notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and a notice icon I10 of a fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Also, the decorative symbols are displayed by one decorative symbol display device per symbol row. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display area 208c is displayed on the third decorative symbol display It is displayed on the device 208G. Note that there may be a decorative symbol display device in which the advance icon display area 285C is not displayed. Further, there may be a decorative symbol display device in which the effect display related to the advance notice icon is not displayed. This is applicable to the embodiments described above and in the embodiments described below.

  FIG. 50 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 50, the first decorative symbol display device 208H disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display device 208I disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208J disposed on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. As compared with the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction but have a somewhat shorter length in the horizontal direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with a frame part projecting at the upper end side, the lower end side and the left end side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J has the upper end side, the lower end side and the right end side. Each frame part is provided projecting. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, respectively, and when the positions are closest to each other, A display can be performed as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H The whole can be coated.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

  FIG. 50 (e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 22 (47), and covers the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. It is shown that the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in FIG. 50 (e1), during execution of swordsman reach, the icon I9 of the box of one thousand displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested, and it is notified that it shifts to the rendering with higher reliability. Is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start moving in the direction in which they approach each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to recognize. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by the digestion of the advance notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to the closest position to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H can hardly be visually recognized It becomes a state. At this time, the reach transition effect as shown in FIG. 22 (49) and described above is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. That is, the reach effect display being executed is slightly darkened across the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the character of the crown appears in a cut-in display, and the reach effect being executed is The display is turned off. This display is rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative symbol and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (e3) to FIG. 50 (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrally formed on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise along. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect is started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start to rotate.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (e6), the button acceptance time meter and the button image 136a are displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is received. To the player to promote the operation of the effect button 136. At this time, variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I is performed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 50 (e7), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the decoration 1 ".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (e8) to FIG. 50 (e9), once all is not displayed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated in this state. And rotates clockwise by 90 degrees along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

  Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move away from each other and return to the initial position, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (e10), The display of the fluctuation fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1" is started across the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e11-1), the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1” that was fluctuating The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed and derived and displayed as a result of the loss.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (e11-2), the display in which the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the fourth notice area YA4 of the notice icon is digested is started. That is, display is performed such that the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. Thus, there are cases where the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J do not operate even if the advance notice icon is digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (e12-2), an effect display is performed in which the princess character dances with a fan, and is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size and displayed to the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and re-variation display is performed, and then a combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit (for example, "decoration 1-decoration" 1) A combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 1" is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 50 (e7 ') shows an example in which the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is derived and displayed when the effect button 136 is operated by the player after the display shown in FIG. 50 (e6) is performed. FIG. That is, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the direction away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (e7 '), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the indigo character is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the display result of the big hit without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J and returning them to the original position (for example, the initial position).

  FIG. 50 (e7 ′ ′) is configured such that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together It shows an example of rendering when it is done. That is, as shown in FIG. 50 (e3) to FIG. 50 (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also performs these operations. It is also possible to make it rotate with it. In this case, for example, the mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be integrally configured or separately It may be configured as a body and configured to be driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can be rotated in a state in which visual recognition is made difficult by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player after the display shown in FIG. 6E is performed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The devices 208J move away from one another. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears to be rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and unlike the case of FIG. 50 (e7 '), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third It can display in the state which the horizontal width of each display screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus 308J was equal.

  FIG. 51 is a view gradually showing another modified example of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the advance notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 51, the transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by overlapping two layers of panels in the depth direction, and predetermined lens cuts are applied to transmission regions of the respective layers. A light emitting means such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission area has a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to appear to be emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 51, the first layer panel disposed on the front side is provided with a lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6 and is disposed on the back side of the first layer panel. In the second layer panel, a lens cut of a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is applied. In FIG. 51, the light guide plate IL is shown surrounded by a broken line. Further, the number of layers of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Here, in the case of being configured in one layer, for example, by changing the pattern of the lens cut, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be configured to be different. Further, in FIG. 51, a first special view display device 212, a second special view display device 214, a common view display device 210, a first special view hold lamp 218, a second special view hold lamp 220, a common view hold lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 51, the holding icon which is the target of the pre-reading advance notice in the holding icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is a default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed while the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, and the variable icon display area 280 and In the hold icon display area 281, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon display area 285 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, and a chance-throughlet display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The contents displayed in the channel through-let display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 45, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 51 (f1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the channel display area 287, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, dark display is displayed. While being performed, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. That is, in FIG. 51 (f2-1), the stock effect of the notice icon by the dark display and the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed. Thereafter, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is ended (turned off), and the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended. It should be noted that dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be ended after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or light guide plate IL may be turned off after dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chan- nellet display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. While the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, the stock effect of the notice icon is displayed. It may be made to be known.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, dark display is performed and The stock effect of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL counterclockwise 90 degrees to cause the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating an effect image You may do so. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured to be separated by the panel of the first layer and the panel of the second layer, and in this case, for example, only the panel of the second layer is rotated and the first The panels of the layer may not be rotated, or the panels of the first layer may be rotated together with the panels of the second layer.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 51 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the forecasted icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 of the preview icon display area 285 so that the future is simulated. It has been predicted that a series of effects will be performed.

  FIG. 51 (g) shows that the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested. As shown in FIG. 51 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 moves the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen and then erases it, at that timing. The notice icon digesting effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  51H shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the stock effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows a state of giving notice in advance. As shown in FIG. 51 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of symbols is performed in the chan- nellet display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and as a result of the variation display of the pattern in the chan-throughlet display area 287, the hat The notice icon I6 is foreshadowed to be derived.

  FIG. 51 (i) shows another example of effect of the advance notice icon digesting effect. As shown in FIG. 51 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing, the light guide plate The light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer also emits light to imitate the effect image Also make an announcement, and perform the notice icon digest presentation. At this time, when the luminescent color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer and the luminescent color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer are different, the pattern formed on the panel of the first layer and the second layer In some cases, it is possible to make the patterns formed on the panel of

  FIG. 51 (j) shows another example of effect of the advance notice icon digesting effect. As shown in FIG. 51 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after moving the hat notification icon I6 displayed in the notification icon display area 285 to the center of the display screen, the hat notification icon I6 is displayed. In the enlarged display on the full screen, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL is made to emit light at that timing to form a pattern imitating the effect image, thereby performing the notice icon digestion and rendering. At this time, although the advance notice icon display area 285 is erased, it may be displayed.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example presentation of the advance notice icon digesting presentation. In FIGS. 52 (1) to (11), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I10 of the fan and is a drink notice icon I31. 22 (44) to (54), only parts different from those described above with reference to FIG. 22 will be described in detail, and description of common parts will be omitted. Further, in this example of the effect, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof can be displaced according to the contents of the effect. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed to a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a drink advance notice icon I31 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. The drink notification icon I31 is a notification icon to notify that the contents to be produced will be changed by digestion.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 52 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 52 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested and the drink notice icon I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink advance notice icon I31 is displayed in an enlarged size, and effect display is performed in which the contents of the drink are sprinkled on the button image 136a.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, effect display is performed in which the liquid spilled from the container of the drink spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the image of the liquid disappears, a projecting button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the projecting position is displayed. At this time, it is a state before the operation acceptance start of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the projecting position at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (17), as shown in FIG. 52 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button acceptance time meter decreases Then, it is informed that the operation acceptance of the effect button 136 has been started. The timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the projecting position may be the same as the timing at which the projecting button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 52 (16), or the projecting button image 136b May be before the display, or may be after the protrusion button image 136b is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the projecting position along with the start of the digestion and rendering of the drink advance notice icon I31. Further, in this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off in a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136. In addition, in a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, it lights in a mode to notify that it is a period other than the operation reception period (for example, lights in blue), and when the operation reception period is reached You may make it light (for example, light red) in the aspect which alert | reports that.

  FIG. 53 is a view showing in stages the example of presentation using movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

  53 (a1) to FIG. 53 (a3), when stocking the notice icon, move the effect movable body 224C to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the stock of the notice icon There is. FIG. 53 (a1) shows the same display as FIG. 41 (1), but the effect movable body 224C simulating a placard with the character display of "STOCK" on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a effect device It is arranged to be hidden behind the 206.

  FIG. 53 (a2) shows that the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden by the effect device 206 to the visible position, which is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the stock of any of the plurality of types of notice icons is stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the kind of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or notification by sound or lamp may be performed. A plurality of types of effect movable bodies 224C may be prepared in accordance with the type of notice icon, and the type of notice icon stocked may be notified according to the type of effect movable body 224C that appears.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, a notice icon stocked is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 53 (a3) shows that the hat advance icon I6 is stocked.

  In FIG. 53 (b), effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that can be rotated about the depth direction as rotational axes are respectively disposed near the upper and lower sides of the decorative symbol display device 208. More specifically, in the upper vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first effect movable body 224Da with the characters "large", the fifth effect movable body 224De with the symbol of the asterisk, and the "panel" The second effect movable body 224Db with the letter “並 ん” is arranged side by side in the lateral direction, and the third effect movable body 224Dc with the character “振” is given in the lower vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208, A sixth effect movable body 224Df with an asterisk symbol and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd with a character of "dance" are arranged side by side in the lateral direction. The first effect movable body 224Da to the sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd Will rotate. In addition, when the advance notice icon is digested, the rotation of the digested number of effect movable bodies may be stopped, or the number of effect movable bodies corresponding to the total number of stock advance notice icons is rotated. It is also good.

  FIG. 53 (c1) to FIG. 53 (c6) show a state in which the presentation movable mode is notified by operating the effect movable body 224. FIG. In this example of presentation, there may be a case where a notice icon I41 of a special training as a notice icon is displayed. When the special notice icon I41 is digested, it shifts to a pre-reading mode informing that the fluctuation display of the special figure that is likely to be a big hit is suspended.

  FIG. 53 (c1) shows that the special training notice icon I41 is digested. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I41 of the special training displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested and displayed moving to the center of the display screen. In addition, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect movable body 224 imitating an arm is disposed. The effect movable body 224 is composed of an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and a base end portion of the upper arm portion 224a is rotatably attached to the effect device 206 via a rotational axis ax1. . Further, the forearm portion 224b is rotatably attached at its base end portion to the tip end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via the rotation axis ax2.

  When the advanced warning icon I41 is digested and the pre-reading mode is started, as shown in FIG. 53 (c2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display “in preparation for training” is displayed right in the strip-like scroll display area. Scrolls from the left to the left. As a result, the player is notified of the shift to the pre-reading mode. On the other hand, in the effect movable body 224, an initial position where the upper arm portion 224a does not overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a position (first position) covering the front side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 An operation of reciprocation between the two (prefetching operation) is performed. Although the prefetching operation by the effect movable body 224 is temporarily returned to the initial position during stop display of the symbol, the operation may be continued even during stop display of the symbol. Also, while the pre-reading operation is being performed, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate, but the forearm 224b may also operate in addition to the upper arm 224a, or the upper arm 224a does not operate. Only the unit 224b may operate.

  FIG. 53 (c3) shows a state in which a reach state is formed by arranging two "decorates 1" in the symbol variation display of the special view 1 which is the target of the pre-reading. Here too, the prefetching operation is being performed continuously.

  FIG. 53 (c4) shows that the special training reach as the super reach effect is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of "during training preparation" is finished, and the character display of "training start" indicating that the training specific reach has been started is performed. In addition, after the effect movable body 224 once returns to the initial position, as shown in FIG. 53 (c5), the upper arm portion 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position, and then as shown in FIG. 53 (c6) The forearm 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a predetermined effect image is displayed to notify that the reliability against the big hit is high.

  FIG. 54 is a view showing by way of example one of the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment step by step showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon It is. In FIG. 54, first special view display device 212, second special view display device 214, common view display device 210, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, common view hold lamp 216, Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 54, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold that is an object of pre-reading notice, but the display mode is, for example, Similar to the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used.

  FIG. 54 (1) is the same display as FIG. 41 (1) described above, so detailed description will be omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 54 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the crown pattern effect starts. Here, the character of the lord YM is in possession of the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  In this effect example, at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (3), the character YM of the lady is moved to the predetermined throwing position, but the notice icon I6 of the hat held is not thrown yet, FIG. 54 (4) As shown in, in a state in which the tomoku character YM stands by at the throwing position, the stop display is performed with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the off-set display result is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 54 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are respectively moved by movement animation. The hold icon displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes a change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is a special view 1 Of the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, the character YM of the lord is still waiting at the throwing position.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (6), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. That is, in this demonstration example, when the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, it is notified that the notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display being executed, but the stocking of the notice icon is performed After the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts, stocking of the notice icon is performed. In addition, although a notice that the notice icon is displayed in the symbol change display being executed when the symbol change display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended is given a so-called Gasseed notice in which the notice icon is not displayed. May be In this case, for example, the character YM of the lord may end the display before the variable display of the symbol to be read is started. For example, the symbol YM may be displayed before the symbol change display to be read. The display may be ended at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. In addition, the display of the character YM of the lord may be ended before the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading ends, for example, the super reach which is performed during the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is started The display of the character YM of the lord may be ended before. In addition, in the case where the advance notice icon is stocked, the character YM may be displayed continuously even after the notice icon is stocked. In addition, in the state where the character of the lord is standing by, when it becomes big hit with the symbol fluctuation indication which is done before the symbol fluctuation indication which throws the announcement icon, the timing which derives the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example The standby display may be continued in a state where the character of the lord has the advance notice icon during the fluctuation display), or may be deleted.

  Then, after that, the effects shown in FIG. 54 (7) to FIG. 10 (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIG. 54 (7) to FIG. (12) and the second decorative symbol are the same except that the variable display is performed, so detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 54 (11) shows that the result of the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the off is decided There is. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  In FIG. 54 (12), the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, when, for example, 4 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 54 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. A warning icon digesting effect is performed where the warning icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect step by step. In FIG. 55, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 55, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold of symbol variation display which is a target of pre-reading, but the display mode is For example, as with the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used.

  In FIG. 55 (a1) to FIG. 55 (a6), a state is shown in which the notice icon shows that the notice icon is stocked and that the notice icon is stocked.

  FIG. 55 (a1) shows that the boring effect to be performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanation display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and a mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display portion 288 shown in FIG. 55 (a1), when a strike is acquired in the bowling game, a character display of "strike item Get" is displayed, which indicates that an item can be obtained as a reward. In this rendering example, when a strike is acquired in the bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, bowling rendition by the character of the lord is started. The contents of the mission displayed on the explanation display portion 288 and the contents of the success reward thereof are not only related to the stock of the advance notice item, but, for example, the hold display relates to the change to the display mode of the advance notice. It may be about the notice about the symbol change display of the. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a dedicated effect display that is displayed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon. In this effect example, it is possible to say that the advance notice of stocking of the advance notice icon is performed by performing the boring effect as shown in FIG. 55 (a1). In addition, this bowling effect may be a dedicated effect performed only for the advance notice regarding stock of the advance notice icon, may be used for the advance notice effect in the symbol variation display being executed, and is used as another advance read advance notice It may be done.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of off is decided. At this time, the boring effect is not finished, and the character display of “following the next change” is displayed, which indicates that the bowling change is continuously performed in the symbol change display to be executed next. In the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "a strike and an item Get" indicating a mission and its success reward is also performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (a3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the ball thrown by the character of the lord is rolled on the lane and moves toward the aligned ten boring pins There is an expectation that the notice icon may be stocked.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (a4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of a scene where the strike is taken is displayed together with the character display of “strike”, and it is assumed that the mission is achieved. As shown, the letter display of "GET" is displayed together with the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, and it is informed that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. It is informed that it was stocked. As described above, in this example of presentation, when the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, the symbol item being displayed is not displayed (stock) while the symbol variation display in progress is displayed. The notice of is done.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the wipe display area WP1 may be displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the bowling effect described above may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55C, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display devices 208K are arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped on the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. By displaying the display area WP2 and displaying the notice icon display area 285C displaying the notice icon in the lower half, the boring effect described above is performed in the wipe display area WP2, and the notice icon to be stocked is displayed as the notice icon display area 285C. It may be displayed on the screen.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 55, when the bowling effect becomes a big hit, when the bowling effect is started at the timing (for example, during the swing fluctuation display) to display the jackpot symbol derived after the super reach The background display of may be displayed, or a background display different from this may be displayed, and for example, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a2) may be displayed.

  Also, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the bowling effect is a big hit, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be ended, but the display may be continued as it is. . Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 55 (c), when the bowling effect is a big hit, the display of the boring effect on the sub display device 208K may be ended, but the display is continued as it is. May be

  FIG. 56: is a figure which shows in steps the other modification of the increase presentation of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. In the above-mentioned embodiment, although the thing which performs change display of special figure 2 preferentially over special figure 1 was explained, in this production example, giving priority to any of special figure 1 change game and special figure 2 change game There is no, and it is applied to what performs the starting opening prize winning order variation which starts the special figure change game which requires suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in order of starting opening prize winning. In addition, it is applicable also to what performs special figure 2 priority change also in this example of an effect. Also, in FIG. 56, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216, Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 56, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold that is an object of pre-reading notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used. Also, among the pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 281, the first pending icon h11, the third pending icon h12 and the fifth pending icon h13 The second reserve icon h21 and the fourth reserve icon h22 are prized and held in the second special view start opening 232, which is a reserve icon showing the variable display of the special figure 1 placed and held. It is a hold icon which shows the change display of the special figure 2.

  The effect shown in FIG. 56 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the line according to the rules of the lottery, and the destination is It is an effect (Amida effect) for acquiring a notice item etc.

  First, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an Amida effect is started. More specifically, when the Amida rendition is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1), one of the start points of the three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction is one of the characters SB of Sabohani. Are arranged, and a hat notice icon I6, a fan notice icon I10, and a lost icon IX are arranged for each end point of the three horizontal lines. In addition, vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are appropriately set, and central portions of these vertical lines are covered with smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined according to, for example, the number of reservations at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited to this. In this Amida rendition, if the character of Sabohani moves along the line according to the rule of Amida as a result of reaching the end point where the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is placed, the notice icon is stocked. When the end point where the lost icon IX is placed is reached, it is informed that stocking of the notice icon is not performed. And, every time the symbol variation display is started, the character SB of Sabohani moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that the character SB of Sabohani may be moved to the position where the vertical line is arranged every time the pseudo-link is performed, for example, when the pseudo-link occurs, it proceeds to the position of the second vertical line ahead It may be equal. Moreover, you may advance to the location of the vertical line 2 or more ahead etc. per symbol fluctuation display of 1 time. In addition, as shown in FIG. 55 (c) or FIG. 55 (d), for example, the effect as shown in FIG. 56 can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or in the sub display device 208K. is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue to display the muddy rendition even during the execution of the super reach. Then, for example, there may be a case where the effect of increasing the notice icon during super reach can be performed in parallel.

  Then, when the variable display of the special view 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, h13 are respectively moved by the movement animation, and the first hold icon The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move to the right one by one. On the other hand, the decoration pattern starts variable display. Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the character SB of Sabohani starts moving from the start point of the upper horizontal line of the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line is moved. When the line is reached, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased, and it is displayed that the horizontal line in the upper row and the horizontal line in the middle line are connected by the vertical line, and the character SB of the sabothani moves along the vertical line. At the timing shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), the middle of the horizontal line is reached.

  After that, when the variation display of the special view 1 ends, the variation display of the special view 2 is started continuously, and the four suspension icons h21, h12, h22, h13 displayed in the suspension icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the movement animation Be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3-1), when the character SB of the sabo hani reaches the second vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the lower horizontal line, the smoke that conceals the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being eliminated, this vertical line is found to be cut off halfway, and the vertical line can not move from the middle horizontal line to the lower horizontal line. Therefore, the character SB of the sabothani middle line Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

  Then, when the variation display of the special view 2 is finished, the variation display of the special view 1 is started continuously, and the three suspension icons h12, h22, h13 displayed in the suspension icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the movement animation . Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), when the character SB of the sabo hani reaches the third vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line, the smoke concealing the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being eliminated, this vertical line is connected to the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line, and therefore, the sabothani character SB follows the rule of the lottery from the middle horizontal line to the upper line. Move to a horizontal line. As a result, the character SB of Sabohani reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line where the notice icon I6 of the hat is arranged, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. After the display indicating that it has been acquired is performed, the Amida effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 Be done.

  In this presentation example, as described above with reference to FIG. 56 (a1-1), any one of a plurality of advance notice icons of different types is selected. For example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 2), place the notice icon I6 of the hat on all the end points of the horizontal line, or arrange the notice icon I10 of the fan on all the end points of the horizontal line as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3) It is also good. In this manner, by arranging the notice icons of the same type at all the end points of the horizontal lines, it is possible to notify the player that it is decided that the displayed notice icons will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3), the fan's notice icon I10 is a notice icon indicating that an effect of giving notice that a big hit will be decided is performed as described above, so the player can In some cases, it may be possible to further increase the expectation for the big hit. The effect as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3) is a kind of premier effect that rarely appears.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-4), without arranging the lost icon IX, arrange the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I10 of the fan, and the notice icon I9 of the one thousand box at the end point of each horizontal line, It may be determined that one of the notice icons is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to safely enjoy the Amida effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-5), the notice icons (head notice icon I6, fan notice icon I10) disposed at the end points of the horizontal lines are disposed on the end points of the horizontal lines. It may be determined that all of the notice icons I9) in the first and second boxes are stocked. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 56 (a1-5), since the notice icon I10 of the fan is included, it is guaranteed that the effect of giving notice that the big hit will be decided is performed, so the player goes to the big hit In some cases, it may be possible to further enhance the sense of expectation of

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-6), the last notice icon of the type of notice icon is not clear at the end point of each horizontal line (the first notice icon I1, the second last notice icon I2, 3 may be placed on the notice icon I3 of the Lord of the Lord, and in this way, the player does not know what notice icon will be stocked until the end point is reached, so it is against the stock of the notice icon. In some cases, it is possible to improve the expectation. In addition, the notice icon of the lord is different in color depending on the type as described above, and the reliability for the big hit is different depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the sense of expectation for the notice icon after the change from the notice icon of the lord, depending on which color the notice icon of the lord is acquired. For example, the notice icon I3 of the third tonome, which is the notice icon of red tonome, is more easily changed to the notice icon on which "pseudo-run" is determined than the notice icon on which "pseudo-run" is not determined On the other hand, it is possible to easily change the notice icon I1 of the first tonome, which is the notice icon of the icon, to a notice icon in which “pseudo chain” is not determined.

  Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3-1) and described above, the central part of the vertical line is concealed by smoke to make it difficult to identify the traveling route of the character SB of the sabo hani. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be hidden by smoke, and the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani may be specified at the time when the staging effect is started. As a result, since the player can recognize in advance which notice icon is to be stocked, the player may be able to safely enjoy the amida effect. Furthermore, in this case, a roulette effect may be performed to determine the start point of the horizontal line where the character SB of Sabohani is arranged, and the effect may be further enhanced.

  Further, in this example of presentation, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1) and described above, the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the Amida effect is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 56 (a2-2), the area in which the notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines are displayed with smoke during execution of the Amida effect is displayed with smoke, and then FIG. 56 (a2-2a As shown in), the notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a2-2a), the lost icon IX is changed to a one-two box advance notice icon I9, and the content of the effect is promoted. In addition, for example, a part of or all of the notice icons of the notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines are changed to an icon IX of the lost or a lower notice icon having a lower rank, etc. You may

  Moreover, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), the central portion of the vertical line is concealed by smoke so that the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani can be predicted to some extent. As shown in a4-2), during the execution of the Amida rendition, the smoke hiding a part of the vertical line extends vertically, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a), the smoke disappears Vertical lines may increase and decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a), before the smoke is extended, the possibility of acquiring either the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is suggested. Then, it is ensured that the third vertical line disappears and the fan's notice icon I10 is stocked.

  Further, in this example of presentation, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), since the second vertical line is cut off halfway, the lost icon IX is not selected. As shown in 56 (a 4-3), the second vertical line is not cut off, so that the lost icon IX is selected, and after completion of the rendition, FIG. 56 (a 4-3 a) As shown in FIG. 10, it may be informed that no notice icon is stocked in any display area of the notice icon display area 285.

  It should be noted that in the above-mentioned Amida rendition, it is possible to give advance notice of the symbol change display which is the object of pre-reading according to the type of notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

  FIG. 57 is a view showing in stages an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, showing in a step out another example of the effect of the notice icon increase effect. is there. In FIG. 57, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 57, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is the hold of the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading, and the hold display becomes the display mode of pre-reading notice (Sabo hani hold icon). It differs from the above-described embodiment in that

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 57A, the notice icon is not displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. In addition, as shown in FIG. 57 (1), symbol variation display is performed in the first special view display device 212, and accordingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol and the second decoration are displayed. The variable display of the symbol is performed.

  Further, in FIG. 57 (1), the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special views 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1, The two reserved icons h11 and h12 and the variation icon h0 are displayed in the default display mode (round no-pattern and white display mode).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (2), when the gaming ball is won in the first special view starting opening 230, the third reserved icon h13 in the special icon 1 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1. It is displayed and notified that the number of reservations is three. Here, the third hold is a hold subject to prefetching. In this presentation example, the hold icon h13 of the third special drawing 1 is displayed not in the default display mode but in the display mode (previous display mode) of the advance notice.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1”, and the display result of the off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Then, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (4), the suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 of the special view 1 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold of the special figure 1 It becomes the icon h11, the hold icon which was in the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special view 1, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 57 (5) shows that the symbol variation display is being continued.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hallus effect is started. Here, the character of the lord YM is in possession of the notice icon I6 of the hat. As described above, in this effect example, a notice icon is displayed (stocked) in the symbol fluctuation display which is started after the symbol fluctuation display performed when the symbol fluctuation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended. A certain hall director production has been started.

  Then, after the main character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (7), the notice icon I6 of the hat held by the user is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (8). An effect display for throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the character of the lord YM succeeds in displaying the advance notice icon and makes a happy expression.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (11) to FIG. (12), display is performed in which the character YM of the lord is framed out below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (14), the move animation is displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is Move to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and change to the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started .

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (16), the movement is displayed by the movement animation, and the holding icon at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started. That is, the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 57 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. A warning icon digesting effect is performed where the warning icon I6 of the hat is digested. As described above, according to this presentation example, it can be said that the prefetch notice by the hold icon is performed simultaneously with the prefetch notice by the notice icon.

  FIG. 58 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a step-by-step manner. FIG. In FIG. 58, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216, Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 58, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold of symbol variation display which is a target of pre-reading, but the display mode is For example, as with the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used.

  FIGS. 58 (a1) to 58 (a3-1) show that a notice effect is given in advance that the notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 58 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and display of the off The results are shown finalized. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any display area.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (a2-1), the movement is displayed by the movement animation, and the holding at the display position of the first holding icon h11 The icon moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11 of the special view 1, and the third holding icon h13 The holding icon at the display position becomes the second holding icon h12 of the special view 1, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a placard PL1 for giving notice that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol variation display to be started next. Specifically, on this placard PL1, a notice icon I6 for a hat is displayed following "with the next change", and then "It is displayed as stock", and a notice icon I6 for a hat is displayed. Notices that it will always be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses and the fluctuation display is ended and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, for example, a hall effect is performed during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display, As shown at 58 (a 3-1), the notice icon I 6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA 1 of the notice icon display area 285. As a result, the player can recognize in advance that stock of the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked, and therefore the player may be able to enjoy playing the game at ease.

  In the example of effect described above, it is notified that the notice icon is always stocked by the display of the placard PL1, but for example, the placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 58 (a2-2) It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on this placard PL2, a hat warning icon I6 is displayed following "with the next change", and then "is a stock" is displayed, but a question mark is added. It is informed that the hat forecast icon I6 may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

  If the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked during the next symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 58 (a3-2), no effect on the stock of the notice icon is performed. In addition, although the effect (for example, a hall effect etc.) regarding the stock of the advance notice icon may be performed, in this case, a so-called Gassestock effect is performed in which the advance notice icon is not stocked.

  58 (b1) to FIG. 58 (b3) show that the prefetching mode which is one of the prefetch notice is performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display which is the target of the prefetching is suspended It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (b1), the game ball is won in the first special view starting port 230, and the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended, and pre-reading notice as a display mode of the third hold icon h13. The hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani as a display mode of is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special view 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a pre-reading mode which is an effect of notifying that symbol variation display having a high probability of becoming a big hit is being held is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (b 2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “super heat approaching” are scrolled from the right to the left in each of the two strip-like scroll display areas. The display is done.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses and the fluctuation display is ended, and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (b3), the symbol fluctuation display is being executed. The hall effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. As described above, according to this presentation example, it is possible to perform prefetching notice by changing the background display, in addition to prefetching notice by stocking the notice icon and prefetching notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 58 (c1) to FIG. 58 (c2), during the symbol variation display being executed at the time the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, the presentation effect etc. are performed, and the notice icon is displayed. Stock may be made.

  FIGS. 58 (d1) to 58 (d3) show that stock of the advance notice icon and digestion are performed during execution of the same symbol variation display. That is, stocking and digesting of a notice icon relating to the notice effect being performed during the symbol variation display is also configured to be executable.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (d1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the hall effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed the notice icon as shown in FIG. 58 (d2). The preview icon in the area 285 is temporarily stocked in the first display area YA1. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 58 (d3), the notice icon digesting effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (e1) to FIG. 58 (e2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown into the notice icon display area 285 by the hall effect, but is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285 You may

  FIG. 59 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and is different from the notice icon increase presentation and the digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing the modification of step by step. In FIG. 59, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 59, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold of symbol variation display which is a target of pre-reading, but the display mode is For example, as with the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is used.

  FIGS. 59 (a1) to 59 (a3) show that the advance notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are both used.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is "jojomachi". There is. In this stage display area 289, in addition to the display of the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display such as the contents of the notice or the explanation of the appearing character may be displayed, or the notice display may be performed. It is also good. Thus, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanation display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described hall effect is performed, and a hat advance notice icon I6 is thrown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and the letter display of "stock" is added, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked. Is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and notice in this notice icon display area 285D. A notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed in the icon first display area YA1.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (b1) to (b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the advance notice icon display area 285D, and the notice icon I6 of the hat appeared by the hall effect is not stocked. You may make it digest. In this way, it is possible to perform the staging effect of the notice icon regarding the notice in the symbol variation display.

  FIGS. 59 (c1) to 59 (c2) show how a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided, and the notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first notice icon display area 285E is provided at the left end of the display screen, and the second notice icon display area is displayed at the right end of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area where a notice icon other than the button notice icon is displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. But it is not limited to this. In the first notice icon display area 285E, four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAL1, the notice icon second display area YAL2, the notice icon third display area YAL3, the notice icon fourth display area YAL4) are provided. In the notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed, and in the notice icon third display area YAL3, a notice icon I7 of a shuriken is displayed. It is displayed. In the second notice icon display area 285F, four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, the notice icon fourth display area YAR4) Is provided, and the notice icon is not displayed in any display area. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, two second button preview icons I11 are enlargedly displayed side by side substantially at the center of the display screen, and it is shown that these second button preview icons I11 are stocked. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (c2), the second button preview icon I11 is displayed in the preview icon first display area YAR1 and the preview icon second display area YAR2 of the second preview icon display area 285F. In this example, the second button advance notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. When the second button preview icon I11 is full after the second button preview icon I11 is full in the second preview icon display area 285F, and the number of Even if the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F and the second button notice icon I11 is digested, the reliability against the big hit is made different. Well, for example, the more the second button preview icon I11 is stocked, the more It may be configured so as to be easy with. Note that not all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may be digested. For example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, there may be a case where only two notices are displayed. In the above, the remaining two button advance notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display, or may be erased without being digested. The first notice icon display area 285E may also be configured such that the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the number of stocked notice items.

  FIG. 59 (d1) to FIG. 59 (d3) show another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (d1), the notice icon I6s for the hat is displayed smaller on the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12 respectively, and the notice icon I7s for the shuriken is held for the first one. It is displayed small on the icon h11. That is, in this presentation example, an example is shown in which the hold icon may be displayed including the notice icon.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (d2), the notice icon I6s of the hat in the reduced display, which is displayed on the fluctuation icon h0, pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and the text display of "stock" is additionally indicated, and it is informed that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Be done. In this production example, every time the suspension of the symbol variation display is digested, an effect of stocking the notice icon displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 is performed, but the timing of stocking the notice icon is this It is not limited.

  Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 59 (e1), the advance notice icon may not be displayed on all the change icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the change icons or the hold icons.

  FIGS. 59 (f1) to (f3) show an example in which the notice icon may not be stocked although the notice icon is displayed on the change icon h0.

  Since FIG. 59 (f1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 59 (d1) and described above, the detailed description will be omitted.

  In this effect example, after that, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol temporarily stops at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (f2), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (f3), the fluctuation icon Although h0 is erased, at this time, together with the fluctuation icon h0, the hat notice icon I6s displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased, and it is informed that the hat notice icon I6 is not stocked. As described above, even if the notice icon is displayed on the change icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

  FIGS. 59 (g1) to 59 (g3) show that when a given notice icon is digested, an effect is obtained in which the same effect is obtained as a plurality of notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (g1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon I51 of a bouquet as a notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Although the notice icon I51 of this bouquet includes two or more icons of the plurality of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 18 (b), the notice icon may be included. It is a difficult aspect to identify.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (g2), when the bouquet advance notice icon I51 is digested, the bouquet advance notice icon I51 is enlarged after being moved from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen Ru.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (g3), the notice icon I51 of the bouquet changes in display to the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the type of notice icon included in the notice icon I51 of the bouquet Can be recognized. Therefore, the player may be able to have a sense of anticipation as to which type of notice icon is included while having the fun of stocking the notice icon.

  In the embodiment described above and the embodiments described thereafter, the notice icon may continue to be displayed even after the symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the symbol variation display may be suspended. When the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, of course, if the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and displayed without the symbol changing display being suspended, the state of the stock also in the demonstration display May be maintained. Also, regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display is suspended, the stock status may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked.

  Also, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be notified.

  Also, effects may be made that the stocked notice icon changes or is promoted (leveled up), for example, effects such as changing the stocked hat notice icon I6 to a fan notice icon I10 When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with the chance eye in a state in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked, the notice icon I6 of the hat may be changed to the notice icon I9 of the one and two box . Also, conversely, an effect may be performed in which the stocked advance notice icon is demoted (leveled down).

  In addition, the effect display performed when the advance notice icon is digested may be changed or promoted (level up), for example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed The effect of changing to the notice icon I10 of the fan may be performed during the operation, or the number of times of pseudo-sequence may be increased in the pseudo-sequence effect executed when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested and executed. Good. Also, conversely, an effect that the effect display performed when the advance notice icon is digested may be demoted (level down) may be performed.

  Even when the button advance icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  When the button preview icon is displayed, the button preview may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  Further, it may be determined whether to make a notice of stocking a notice icon or not, according to the length of the symbol variation display time.

  In addition, the length of the fluctuation display time in the case of not giving a notice of stocking the advance notice icon between the symbol fluctuation display serving as a big hit and the symbol fluctuation display serving as a loss may be the same or different.

  In addition, as a variation display time of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, a variation time of a length in which stock of the notice icon is not performed may be selected.

  In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed, the notice of stocking the notice icon may be controlled in a controlled manner.

  In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is executed to execute the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the effect data table may be set so as not to give a notice of stocking a notice icon.

  Also, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the variation time of the length for stocking the advance notice icon may be selected. Here, the stock advance notice icon may be digested in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 interrupted, or may be digested in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which has been interrupted.

  Also, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, it is stocked in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 before being interrupted is performed. The notice icon may not be digested as it is stocked, or may be configured to be digested.

  Further, the type of the advance notice icon is not limited to those described above or those to be described later, and various types can be adopted.

  For example, an item for customization may be displayed as a notice icon, and when this item for customization is digested, for example, increase of selectable BGM, increase of selectable background, selection by player It may be possible to increase the possible effect mode (eg, one-shot notification mode, etc.).

  Further, for example, an item for effect selection may be displayed, and when the item for effect selection is digested, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, the volume setting, or the like The luminance setting may be made possible.

  Also, for example, an item for user setting clear may be displayed, and when the item for user setting clear is digested, for example, the user setting may be enabled to be cleared, or the user setting is cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do so.

  Further, for example, an item for effect mode end may be displayed, and when the item for effect mode end is digested, for example, it is possible to end the prefetch mode or end the effect mode. Alternatively, it may be possible to end after the end of the pre-reading mode or the end of the effect mode.

  Also, for example, a point earning item or a level up presentation item may be displayed, and if these items are digested, for example, points can be presented or the level can be increased. You may

  Further, for example, the reach effect corresponding to the advance notice icon may be started, and for example, when the icon of the lord is digested, the lord of the hall VS the swordsman reach may be performed.

  In addition, for example, there may be a case where the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the icon of the present is digested, the icon "next notice" is displayed, and the notice effect of "next notice" is displayed. May be started.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon (divination icon) whose fortune-telling starts when it is digested. In this case, the fortune telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that displays information on simultaneous island production when it is digested. For example, a countdown to the start of simultaneous production of islands may be started, or a time until the start of simultaneous production of islands may be displayed, or the contents of simultaneous production of islands to be performed next will be displayed. It is also good.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that enables store-side customization when digested. For example, even if it is possible to perform setting according to the area of the game arcade to be installed (for example, setting of the Tohoku regional mode or Chubu regional mode etc.) or setting of the name of the gaming arcade to be installed Good. For example, depending on the setting, it is possible to make the group notice character (for example, namahage group etc.) appearing in the Tohoku region mode different from the group notice character (for example, shachihoko group etc.) appearing in the central region mode. There is a case.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that starts the tutorial display when it is digested.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon where roulette effect is started when it is digested. In this roulette effect, for example, there are displayed a result indicating that a promotion effect of the display mode of the holding icon is performed, or a result indicating that a notice of the symbol variation display is performed.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original when it is digested.

  Next, modifications of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. Here, FIG. 60 is a view showing gradually an example of an effect that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 61 is a view explaining a lottery table related to notice items. It is.

  In FIG. 60, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special view display device 212, a second special view display device 214, a first special view hold lamp 218 and a second special view hold lamp 220 are shown. The common drawing display device 210, the common drawing reservation lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (a), the reserved icon display area 281A of the special figure 1 and the reserved icon display area 282A of the special figure 2 are adjacent to the left and right below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as you would like. In FIG. 60 (a), the number of reservations is 0 in both of FIG. 1 and FIG. And in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is stopped and displayed by "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" which is a combination of the decoration symbols corresponding to exfoliation. A notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the reserved icon display area 282A of the special view 2, and a notice icon Ih of a princess is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, although the notice icon is displayed in the left-aligned state, the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the advance notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may be displayed as needed.

  In FIG. 60 (b), it is shown that two gaming balls have won a prize in the first special view starting opening 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special view 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side on the left. Each of these hold icons h11 and h12 is in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (c), the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special view 1, since the first hold is digested, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left and becomes a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. Further, at this time, since the gaming ball has won in the second special view starting opening 232, in the pending icon display area 282A of the special view 2, the pending icon h21 corresponding to the first pending is displayed left-justified. The hold icon h21 is a default display mode.

  Then, when the timing shown in FIG. 60 (d) comes, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold of the special view 1 is the display mode of the pre-reading notice (the display mode in which "heat" is displayed Change to).

  After the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes, when the timing shown in FIG. 60 (e) comes, the notice icon It of the lady and the notice icon Ih of the princess are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. Ru. That is, the display in which the advance notice icon increases is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (f), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the notice icon Ih of the princess increased after the notice icons Ih of the two princess is digested. And the character HI of the princess accompanied by a balloon with the letters "Atari" and "question mark" appears. The timing of appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (g), after "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, which is a result of off Is notified.

  In this embodiment, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed prior to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. Ru. In this embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the notice icon is displayed when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 becomes a loss. There is no digestion of the icon and no increase in the notice icon. Therefore, while the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is being performed, the advance notice icon may not be displayed, or the advance notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed. In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 concerned becomes a big hit, it is possible not to do neither the digestion of the notice icon nor the increase indication, when the digestion and the increase indication of the notice icon are performed There may be. On the other hand, the pending icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed continuously, or any of the pending icon display areas 281A and 282A may not be displayed. Only the area 282A may be displayed. In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When a dedicated background is displayed, the advance notice icon display area 285A may be hidden, and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (i), the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3", and it is informed that the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is disapproval .

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (j), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 being held is started, and the notice icon It of the lady is digested and “atari” and “question mark” are displayed. A character of the lord YI accompanied by a balloon of letter writing appears. In addition, the timing of appearance of the marshal character YI may be before, after or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 60 (j), the warning icon Id of the bad agent is additionally displayed in the warning icon display area 285A. That is, the display in which the advance notice icon increases is performed. Here, the timing when the warning icon Id of the bad official is additionally displayed may be before or after the start of the digest display of the warning icon It of the lady, or may be after the same time. It may be

  After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the notice icon Ih of the princess and the notice icon of the bad officer Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil officer character DI appear. The timing of appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. In addition, the timing of appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the timing of appearance of the character of the bad officer.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , It is informed that it has been a big hit.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the lottery table of the notice icon relationship for determining whether or not to execute the increase display and the digest display of the notice icon in this effect example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the hold of the special figure 1, 4 Execute increase display of the notice icon of the lord with probability of / 50, execute increase display of notice icon of the princess with probability of 3/50, execute increase display of the notice icon of the evil officer with probability of 2/50 . Also, on the other hand, execute the digest display of the forerunner notice icon with the probability of 40/50, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the princess with the probability of 35/50, and the notice icon of the evil officer with the probability of 25/50 Execute the digestion display of In addition, since the execution lottery of these increase display and digest display is performed for each notice icon, the increase display is performed simultaneously for two or more notice icons, or the digest display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons. There is.

  Moreover, when the result of the big hit determination performed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a loss, as a result of the pre-reading of suspension of FIG. 1, the symbol variation display which becomes a big hit is suspended In addition, execute the increase display of the notice icon of the lord with probability of 3/50, execute the increase display of notice icon of the princess with probability of 2/50, increase the notice icon of the evil officer with probability of 1/50 Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the lord with probability of 1/50, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the princess with probability of 10/50, and the notice icon of the evil officer with probability of 15/50 Execute the digestion display of

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), when the big hit determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the reserve of special figure 1 Execute the increase display of the notice icon of the lord with the probability of 25/50, execute the increase display of the notice icon of the princess with the probability of 20/50, and the increase display of the notice icon of the evil officer with the probability of 7/50 Run. Also, on the other hand, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the lord with a probability of 20/50, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the princess with a probability of 15/50, and the notice icon of a bad officer with a probability of 5/50 Execute the digestion display of In addition, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine that is not supposed to win a prize in the second special view starting opening 232 in the normal gaming state (non-power support state), even if the jackpot determination result is a big hit It is also possible not to increase display on the notice icon of, and not to display digest on any notice icon.

  In addition, when the big hit decision result which is executed with the start of design fluctuation indication of special figure 2 is off, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of reservation of special figure 1, increase indication is indicated concerning any notice icon It does not take place, and does not perform the digestion display about any notice icon.

  In addition, for example, when the power support state ends and one or a plurality of reservations remain for the symbol variation display of the special view 2, the preliminary display icon of the preliminary view regarding the suspension of the special illustration 2 is not displayed Alternatively, in accordance with the big hit determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the increase display and the digest display of the advance notice icon may be performed.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 62 to 73 are diagrams showing in stages the modified example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 62 to 73, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Moreover, in FIG. 62-FIG. 73, the example which has arrange | positioned and arranged three decorative symbol display apparatuses in a row is shown. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed as the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a transparent light guide plate is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission area. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 62 to 73, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is smaller than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate may be movable. In addition, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, in FIG. 62-FIG. 72, the appearance of the speaker 120 and the presentation button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing gradually another example of the notice icon increase presentation and the digestion presentation applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 63 is a drawing showing the continuation of an example of the presentation shown in FIG. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, a fluctuation icon h0 is at the center thereof. It is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. In addition, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanatory display unit is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and various information related to games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents thereof are updated at appropriate timings. Be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 62 (a), “Tomon-sama is a general Yatsushiro” is displayed, and a description is given regarding the character of the courtesan. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is displayed preferentially during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region not overlapping the display region of the first decorative symbol, but with the display region of the first decorative symbol It may overlap. Here, the explanation display unit (or the explanation display area) may be a place where something is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, when the stage name is displayed in red and the stage name is displayed in red in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and it is hot when transitioning to a certain stage, the display may be an explanatory display instead of a notice. Conversely, when displaying ordinary stage names in white, it is not hot as compared to the red stage name display, and this may also be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, at the lower part of the display screen, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying a stage name and a reach name currently being performed is arranged. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 62 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are displayed. In addition, the character of the lord may be always displayed or may not be always displayed.

  In addition, a household crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and can be moved up and down according to the contents of the effect. ing. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, and the general character 224Fb are disposed, and move vertically in accordance with the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Subsequently, when the gaming ball wins the first special view starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (b), the third special icon hold icon h13 (third reserved icon) in the reserved icon display area Is displayed, and it is informed that the number of reservations has become three. Here, the third hold is hold of the symbol variation display that has been the object of the pre-reading. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode, but in a display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle) of the prefetch notice. At this time, an audio output of "Pon" is made from the speaker 120, and it is informed that the pre-reading advance notice by the hold display has been performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (c), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1” in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display result of the off Is finalized. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11 The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 The hold icons at the display position of the third hold icon h13 become the second hold icon h12, and move to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (d), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started Be done. In addition, in the tutorial display part TT1, the character display of "Tomonashi is Yatsushiro general" is still performed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tonosama character is started, and the Tonosama character has the bomb-like icon (bomb icon) I61. It is shown that it is going to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that has various effects on presentation by throwing by the character of the lord. The throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed as an animation in which the displayed notice icon can be identified or can not be identified. In this case, it may be identifiable from the middle of the throwing, or may be identifiable from the beginning. Also, an animation relating to a notice icon (high expectation degree notice icon) having a high probability of big hit when it is digested, and an animation relating to a notice icon having a low probability of big hit when it is digested more than the high anticipation notice animation. The display manners of the animations may be the same or different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (f), it is shown that the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (g), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what has been displayed as "Don's grandfather is Yatsushiro" has been changed to "With notice icon digest ..." and something is changed by digesting the notice icon. An explanation of what happens is given. The timing at which the display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be simultaneous with the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61 The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or from the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the bomb icon I61 to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing may be later than the movement to the As described above, in the tutorial display section TT1, a plurality of types of explanatory displays may be displayed in one symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (i), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a warning icon I62 for swordsman . The swordsman's advance notice icon I62 is an icon for giving notice of transition to swords reach, as described later. In addition, at the timing when the warning icon I62 for swordsman appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Don" for notifying of that. Here, the advance notice icon may have a combination of one-to-many to many-to-many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (j), the warning icon I62 of swordsman is displayed at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Pakien" to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked, and then, as shown in FIG. 62 (k), the bombardment of the bomb icon I61 by the Tonosama character The animation ends. As described above, since the sword warning icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. Here, visual difficulty means that visual recognition is more difficult than in the case where the advance notice icon does not overlap with the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. In addition, speaking of the fact that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is superimposed on the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, the player can easily draw attention to the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the sword's notice icon I62. There are times when you can. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to notice the presence of the tutorial, or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the presentation explanation that may occur earlier or in the future.
In addition to the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, the arrangement position of the notice icon I62 for the swordsman may be arranged in the vicinity of the tutorial display unit TT1, and even in this way, the same effect can be obtained. There are times when you can get it. In addition, the content indicated by the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the warning icon I62 of swordsman, or even the content having nothing to do with the warning icon I62 of swordsmaster The content may be good, the content relating to the current rendering, or the content may not have anything to do with the current rendering. In FIG. 62 (j), the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is the display related to the notice icon and is the display related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, but the display of the notice icon I62 for the swordswoman The content of the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62, although it is related to the content of the explanation as it happens. It may be configured to be When displaying the tutorial display in accordance with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed prior to the notice icon, or the notice icon may be displayed prior to the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and the notice icon are displayed. It may be displayed simultaneously. The swordsman's notice icon I62 placed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1 is digested in the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading, as described later. It should be noted that the swordsman's advance notice icon I62 may be digested in the symbol variation display performed prior to the symbol variation display of the target of pre-reading. Thereby, the overlap with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated before the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is started. In this example of presentation, the explanation has been made of the case where the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display section ST1.

  Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of “decor 6-dec 2- The stop display is performed in combination, and the display result of the off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". Also, as shown in FIG. 62 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "With notice icon digestion ..." to "Panda is the master of the temple" The relationship between the character of the lord and the character of the panda is described. That is, in this example of the effect, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be changed to a new content in a state where the notice icon I62 of swordsman is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. Furthermore, in other words, it can be said that a new explanation display is started in a state where the swordsman advance notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display section TT1. The display change timing of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, It may be timing later than the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the timing of the display change of the tutorial display unit TT1 is the timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the explanatory display a plurality of times in one symbol variation display. It can be said that it may be started.

  FIG. 62 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display targeted for pre-reading is finished. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the display result of the off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6". Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is master of the lord" to "When Yatsushiro general moves ..." There is an explanation that something happens when Yatsushiro character 224Fa and general military item 224Fb are operated.

  Then, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the display position of the first hold icon h11 is The hold icon is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (n), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started Be done.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c respectively, and the reach state is formed. Be done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (p), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging, and has a feeling of expectation as to whether or not the sword's notice icon I62 is digested. By doing this, it may be possible to make the player crave that the advance notice icon should be used earlier. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display is performed according to the swing of the warning icon I62 of the swordsman. The effect display may not be performed. This effect display is applied to the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1, so that it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the warning icon I62 of the swinging sword player has moved upward and has been digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a voice “Pakien” to notify that the advance notice icon has been digested. As a result, the overlap state due to the warning icon I62 of the swordsman to the tutorial display section TT1 may be eliminated, and the player may be able to easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (a) following FIG. 62 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a display is provided to notify of development into super reach (sword reach). That is, in this example of rendering, the development to the reach of swordsmen is forecasted by the consumption of the notice icon I62 of swordsman. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, and it is demonstrated that the reliability against a big hit in the sword reach is high. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 63 (c) shows that a sword strike is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to a background dedicated to swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Kengo reach" is made. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, in the sword reach, the UI unit is framed out downward, so the display position of the fluctuation icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may be framed out after the hold icon is erased, or the UI unit may be framed out for each hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, when the explanation display is being performed, the UI may be framed out after the hold icon and the explanation display are simultaneously erased. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are erased may be different.

  In FIG. 63 (d), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (e), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It informs that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and promotes the operation of the effect button 136 to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that the operation reception state is received. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be simultaneous with the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or even before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. Alternatively, it may be later than the timing when the effect button image 136a is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (f), as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L The cut-in image to which the character display of “Z” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (h), the main character of the hero loses to the hostile swordsman, and in FIG. 63 (i), both of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” A combination of decorative symbols is derived and shaking is initiated.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. -Display is stopped by a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 2", and the display result of off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". In addition, if a notice icon (for example, the notice icon I10 of the fan mentioned above) for performing a resurrection effect after stocking once is displayed once, the background display changes from the background of the sword reach to the background of the castle town which is a normal background. It may be digested after returning.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing gradually another example of the notice icon increase presentation and the digestion presentation applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a series of an example of the presentation shown in FIG. It is. Since Fig. 64 (a) to Fig. 64 (l) are the same as Fig. 62 (a) to Fig. 62 (l), the description here is omitted.

  FIG. 64 (m) shows that the symbol variation display performed one before the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 64 (m), the notice icon symbol CS (sometimes referred to as "decoration C") displayed as "C" in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed, "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration A temporary stop is displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of 6 ". When the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed, it has a function to notify that the notice icon I63 of chance up, which will be described later, is stocked. When the notice icon symbol CS is displayed, the notice icon I63 of chance up may be always stocked, or the notice icon I63 of chance up may not be stocked. Further, the notice icon symbol CS may include an image (including an enlarged and reduced image itself) imitating the notice icon I63 of chance up, and it may be moved to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, it is sufficient for the notice icon acquiring animation by the symbol to be displayed so that the notice icon can be identified. In addition, there may be one that does not correspond to the notice icon symbol CS and the notice icon I63 of chance increase. In addition, the types of preview icons displayed in the form may be more or less than the types of preview icons not displayed in the form. The type of notice icon displayed at the moment of animation (for example, throwing animation) relating to the character of Tonosama is the notice displayed at the moment of animation relating to the pattern (for example, animation performed by displaying the notice icon symbol CS). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons displayed at the timing of both animations. A notice icon may be displayed as both a symbol and a mini character. For example, the icon of the pseudo linked notice may be displayed with two occasions, and may be stocked with two occasions with a change of 1 and may not be. Further, in the second decorative symbol, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in any symbol row. The fluctuation icon h0 is deleted here, but may be displayed. In addition, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "The panda is the master of the lord" to "When General Yatsui moves ...".

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, the notice icon I63 of chance up jumps from the notice icon symbol CS as shown in FIG. 64 (n), and FIG. As shown in), it is a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 and moved to the right of the swordsman's notice icon I62, and placed (stocked). Then, a voice "Pakien" is output from the speaker 120, and it is informed that the chance-up advance notice icon I63 has been stocked. In addition, the notification by audio | voice output in particular is not performed at the timing when the notice icon I63 of the chance up jumps out. This is because it is possible for the player to easily recognize that stocking of the notice icon I 63 of chance up is stocked by deriving the notice icon symbol CS, but notification by voice may be performed. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by the plurality of advance notice icons. Further, according to this presentation example, a plurality of notice icons can be stocked. Further, in this example of presentation, the timing of stocking is different between the notice icon I62 of swordsman and the notice icon I63 of chance up, and therefore, the contents of presentation until stocked are different.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 64 (p), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 1-decorative C-decorative 6” in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display result of the off Is finalized. In addition, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 64 (q), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the display position of the first hold icon h11 The hold icon is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (q), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. Be done.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (a) following FIG. 64 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decor 2” is stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed and the reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (b), the swordsman notice icon I62 starts swinging. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the warning icon I62 for swords is the right side of the warning icon I62 for swords as well as the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1. The warning icon I63 of the chance up which is being stocked also depends on, so it may be possible to draw attention to the notice icon I63 of chance up being stocked in addition to the explanation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the warning icon I62 of the swinging sword player has moved upward and has been digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a voice “Pakien” to notify that the advance notice icon has been digested. In this rendering example, the overlap state due to the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display unit TT1 is canceled, but the chance-up notice icon I63 is still in the state of overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. In addition, when the warning icon I62 of swordsman is digested, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the warning icon I62 of swords so that the warning icon I62 of swordsman is made to stand out, as shown in FIG. 65 (c). As shown, this effect display may be applied to the tutorial display section TT1 or the notice icon I63 for the chance up, and may be able to draw attention to the explanation display and the notice icon I63 for the chance up.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a display is provided to notify that the game will be developed to reach the sword. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the pattern formed on this light guide plate also overlaps with the notice icon I63 of the chance up which was not digested before the transition to the super reach (Kenshi reach), and the display state of the notice icon I63 of the chance up May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 65 (e), a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the notice icon I63 of chance increase. There is. Here, since a predetermined distance is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative symbol display device, it is possible to avoid overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate depending on the position viewed by the player. In some cases, it may be possible to easily recognize the notice icon I63 of chance increase.

  FIG. 65 (f) shows that a sword strike is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to a background dedicated to swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Kengo reach" is made. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (f), a state in which the character of the lord and the character of swordsman are confronted is displayed. In addition, in Ken-Age reach, the UI unit is framed out downward, so the display position of the fluctuation icon h0 moves downward, but the notice icon I63 for chance up is not affected and the display position is Not changed.

  In FIG. 65 (g), animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (h), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the button image 136a together with the button acceptance time meter. . At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that the operation reception state is established. Here, the advance notice icon I63 of the chance up starts swinging, and gives a feeling of expectation as to whether or not the advance notice icon I63 of chance up is digested. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display is performed according to the swing of the notice icon I63 of the chance up.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (i), as shown in FIG. 65 (j), the first decorative symbol display device 208L The cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display of “Z” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the notice icon I63 of the chance increase which has been swinging moves upward and is being digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (l), the second cut-in image in which the display image is extended in the upper right direction is displayed with overlapping on the first cut-in image, and the big hit is displayed. It has been reported that the reliability of That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the notice icon I63 of the chance up. Note that the first cut-in image may be deleted when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image is displayed by being replaced with the second cut-in image. May be Also, when the second cut-in image is displayed, if another notice icon is stocked, the second cut-in image may overlap with the stock notice icon. The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stock notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon. The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon. In the embodiment described above and the embodiment described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is simultaneous with the timing at which the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. It may be timing before execution of the production corresponding to the notice icon concerned is started, or timing after the execution of the production corresponding to the notice icon concerned may be started. Further, in this example, the notice icon overlaps with the tutorial display section TT1 when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, but any display when the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed. There is no overlap. That is, although the area to be displayed is predetermined, and the notice icon stocked may overlap with another image at a certain trigger, but may not overlap with another image at a certain trigger. Can. When the notice icon I63 of chance up is used to promote the button display shown in FIG. 65 (h), the notice icon is digested and disappears before the start of the other cut-in display to be promoted, etc. You may or may not disappear.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (m), the main character of the hero wins over the swordsman of the enemy role, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols of is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. -Display is stopped by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decor 2", and the display result of the big hit is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  FIG. 66 is a diagram gradually showing another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 66, after the advance notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the third advance symbol icon is transported to the stock position by sliding the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It shows how they are going.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The first hold icon h11 of the variation icon h0 and the two hold icons is in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 66 (a1), “jojo town” is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and as described later, there may be a case where an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR is performed. Further, in the example of the effect, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and "With advance notice icon digestion ..." is displayed. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 pops out downward from inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from "With notice icon digestion ..." to "The swordsman is the lord of the lord". Note that the timing of changing the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR, or at a timing before the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR. It may be present, or it may be a timing later than the timing when the bomb icon I 61 jumps out of the treasure box image TR.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out of the treasure chest image TR bursts. The burst effect display overlaps the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to view. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a4), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to the swordswoman notice icon I62. At this time, since the warning icon I62 for swordsman is overlapped on the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to view. Then, at the timing when the warning notice icon I62 appears, a voice "Pakien" notifying that effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the warning notice icon I62 is stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides in the left direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N goes to the initial position so that the display of the warning icon I62 of the swordsman maintains the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the warning icon I62 for swordsman is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (ie, the warning icon I62 for swordsman is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L While moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the manner as in the next step), the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a6), it is shown that the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the notice icon I62 for the swordsman moves completely from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap to the tutorial display section TT1 by the warning icon I62 for the swordswoman is canceled. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide in the right direction toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66 (a7).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 (b1) to 66 (b8), another example of the notice icon increase effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (b1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The first hold icon h11 of the variation icon h0 and the two hold icons is in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in this example of the effect, the tutorial display section TT1 is disposed at the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is displayed as "the swordsman is the enemy of the lord" as an explanatory display. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 66 (b1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed below the display screen, and there may be a case where an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR is performed. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 pops out upward from inside.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b3), the bomb icon I6 popped out of the treasure box image TR changes to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman displayed enlarged, and then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b4), the treasure box image TR Is erased. At this time, a voice "Pakien" notifying that effect is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the swordsman's advance notice icon I62 is stocked. The timing of audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I6 changes to the warning icon I62 for swordsman, or from the timing at which the bomb icon I6 changes to the warning icon I62 for swordsman The timing may be before the timing, may be after the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the warning icon I62 of swordsman, or may be before the treasure box image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing when the treasure box image TR is erased, or may be the timing after the treasure box image TR is erased.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides in the left direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5), a portion overlapping the UI portion displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see It may be

  After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N goes to the initial position so that the display of the warning icon I62 of the swordsman maintains the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the warning icon I62 for swordsman is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (ie, the warning icon I62 for swordsman is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L While moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the manner as in the next step), the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (b6), it is shown that the warning icon I62 for swordsman is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide in the right direction toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N is returned to the initial position, the overlap by the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L is eliminated, and the player The instruction display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be easily visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b8), the warning icon I62 of swordsman is displayed at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size. Then, a voice "Pakien" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman advance notice icon I62 has been stocked. As described above, since the sword warning icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  In this presentation example, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5 '), the heights of the lower end edges of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N must be at least the first decorative symbol display device If the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L if the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed in 208L is higher than the displayed position, the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed. It is possible to create a non-overlapping state, so that, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N on which the advance notice icon is displayed is in the vicinity of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Since the slide movement is performed, the third decoration symbol display while visually recognizing the display state of the tutorial display unit TT1 There is a case that can be seen also directed by location 208N.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 66, when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid and then the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the notice icon. May be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L by transferring the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, when the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlapping state of the notice icon to the tutorial display unit TT1 may be eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily viewed.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram gradually showing another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 67, the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally out of frame, and it is shown that the frame is inserted from below when the explanation display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a1), since three variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0, the first suspension icon h11, and the second suspension icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third suspension icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. There is. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 67 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb Is arranged. In the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started from the lower side of the frame on the display screen, and thereafter shown in FIG. 67 (a3) At the timing, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a4), “A lady is General Yatsushiro” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  After that, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), as shown in FIG. 67 (a5) to FIG. 67 (a6), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward and the first decorative symbol Frame out from the display device 208L. Note that the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the animation to start the frame out, or may be deleted at the timing to start the animation to start the frame out, or the frame is displayed. It may be deleted at the timing after the start of the animation, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display unit TT1 is completed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (a7), for example, after the warning icon I62 for swordsmen is stocked in the manner described above and shown in FIG. 62 (e) to FIG. As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is started again from the lower side of the frame on the display screen, and thereafter, in FIG. At the timing shown, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the back side of the stock sword advance warning icon I62, and as a result, it is overlapped with the sword advance notice icon I62.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a11), an explanatory display of “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, but the tutorial display unit TT1 is overlapped by the notice icon I62 of swordsman. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, making it difficult to view.

  After that, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, the animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out starts, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (a12) The overlap state to TT1 is eliminated. When the instruction display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display unit TT1 goes out of the frame, the instruction display may be easy to visually recognize due to the elimination of the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frames out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation of the frame out ends.

  Also in this example of presentation, as shown in FIGS. 67 (b1) to (b2), even when the notice icon is digested and rises while the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon The overlapping state to the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. Since FIG. 67 (b1) to FIG. 67 (b2) are as shown in FIG. 62 (p) to FIG. 62 (q) and described above, detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of effects of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 68 shows that the tutorial display is performed also in the conversation presentation of the character in addition to the tutorial display in the tutorial display section TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a1), since three variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0, the first suspension icon h11, and the second suspension icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third suspension icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. There is. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), it is displayed that "the lord is a general Yatsushiro". In this rendering example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display unit. Furthermore, in this effect example, a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, along with the character CH1 of Princess Princess. The character CH1 of the Little Princess and the blowout part TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversational effect (or speech effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), an advance notice display, and the like are performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a1), the blowout portion TT2 displays an explanatory message that “gold is hotter than red”, and an explanation regarding a notice made in this pachinko machine 100 is made. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Although the blowout part TT2 may overlap with the first decorative symbol, it may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the balloon portion TT2 or the balloon portion TT3 described later. Further, the display exactly the same as the display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on the balloon units TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger or smaller display area than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have larger or smaller font font than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. In addition, the font may be the same or different in the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon units TT2 and TT3. In addition, although the blowout portions TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol may not overlap in a display area where other explanatory display is performed, but may overlap. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a lower frequency or a higher frequency at which the explanation display is performed than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, both the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon units TT2 and TT3 may be display areas divided by lines, or any one or both may be display areas not divided by lines.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb Is arranged.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a2), the balloon part TT2 is erased together with the character CH of Princess Chibi. Also, the decorative symbol is still being displayed in a variable manner. Thus, unlike the tutorial display unit TT1, the balloon unit TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The blowout part TT2 may also be configured to be displayable over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a3), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 3-decorative 4-decorative 1” in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display result of the off Is finalized. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1". In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1, it is still displayed that "the lord is a general Yatsushiro".

  Then, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 68 (a4), the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 The hold icons at the display position of the third hold icon h13 become the second hold icon h12, and move to the corresponding pedestal. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started Be done. In addition, in the tutorial display part TT1, the character display of "Tomonashi is Yatsushiro general" is still performed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the manner in which the character of the lord tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. It is done. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, on the left side of the display screen, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is again displayed together with the blowout part TT2, and a conversational effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a5), the blowout portion TT2 is displayed as “Kenou reach is hot” and a description regarding a specific super reach is given. The timing when the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, or may be simultaneous with the beginning of the throwing animation, or at the timing after the throwing animation has started It may be.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a6), it is shown that the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61. Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon TT3 as a third tutorial display unit (explanation display unit) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the eyelid character GY1. ing. The whistle character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversational effect (or speech effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, and the like are performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a6), the balloon unit TT3 displays an explanatory message "Pander intruding", and an explanation regarding the notice effect is given. Here, although the blowout part TT3 overlaps on the front side of the first decorative symbol, it may be disposed at a position not overlapping. Note that the timing when the blowout part TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing when the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing when the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61. The timing may be later than the timing when the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61. In addition, the conversational effect by the character CH1 of the little princess and the character GY1 of the beard may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a7), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what has been displayed as "Don's grandfather is Yatsushiro" has been changed to "With notice icon digest ...". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is at a position overlapping the front side of the blowout part TT3, and it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed in the blowout part TT3. Therefore, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to easily draw attention to the display of the balloon portion TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the instruction display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3. The timing may be before the timing, or may be after the timing when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the blowout part TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord is ruptured. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has burst may be at a position overlapping the front side of the blowout part TT3, and it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of characters displayed in the blowout part TT3.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a9), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to the swordswoman notice icon I62. At this time, there is a case where the warning notice icon I62 of the swordsman is at a position overlapping the front side of the blowout part TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the blowout part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, at the timing when the warning icon I62 for swordsman appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Don" for notifying of that. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is possible that the other image may be overlapped with only one of the displays of the two displayed conversational renderings (the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3). It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (a10), the warning icon I62 of swordsman is displayed at a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice “Pakien” to notify that the swordsman advance notice icon I 62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman advance notice icon I62 may overlap with a plurality of display units (the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon unit TT3) on which the explanation display is performed.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 68 (a1) to 68 (a10), an explanatory display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed on the balloon (the balloon TT2 and the balloon TT3) displayed together with the character. For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), while changing the display mode of the blowout part TT2 (for example, changing the color of the base of the blowout part TT2 to red), By displaying or the like, there may be a case where a notice display or a preview notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed.

  FIGS. 68 (c1) to 68 (c3) show other examples of the content displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. It is shown that the swordsman notice icon I62 is starting to swing. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1, an explanation display “a panda is a master of a lord” is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the warning icon I62 of the swinging sword player has moved upward and has been digested. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c3), the display on the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is master of the lord" to "Development to reach the Ken Osamu", and an explanatory display about the event that will occur from now on Display) is made. By configuring in this way, the player may be able to easily understand that it occurs as the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c3), the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Pakien" to notify that the advance notice icon has been digested.

  In the example of presentation described above, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having the function of performing an explanatory display of the presentation, but for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 is While changing (for example, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed to red) and displaying the letters "extensive heat" etc., there may be a case where a notice display or a preview notice display in the symbol variation display is also performed. It is also good.

  FIG. 69 shows, in stages, another example of effects of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 69 shows that the UI unit displays the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 integrally in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2 is erased. In addition, also in this demonstration example, when it becomes super reach, the UI unit is configured to frame out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if it becomes super reach, display is performed without frame out. You may leave it alone.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section surrounded by a rectangular frame is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit shown in FIG. 69 (a1), a reserved icon display area is formed at the center. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the upper center of the UI unit, and variation icons are displayed in a mode of being placed on a frame configured by the UI unit. At the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is disposed on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is disposed on the left side of the hold icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), "Preliminary icon digest ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "Jojo town stage" is displayed, It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general role item 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a2), when the gaming ball is won in the first special view starting port 230, the third special icon 1 reserved icon (third reserved icon h13) in the reserved icon display area. Is displayed, and it is informed that the number of reservations has become three. Here, the third hold is hold of the symbol variation display that has been the object of the pre-reading. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode, but in a display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle) of the prefetch notice.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a3), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 3-decorative 4-decorative 1” in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display result of the off Is finalized. At this time, the change icon h0 is not deleted but may be deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

  Thereafter, symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 69 (a4), the throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is similar to the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 62 (e) to (k) and described above.

  In FIG. 69 (a5), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts, the bomb icon I61 bursts changes to the notice icon I64 of the princess and moves to the stage name display section ST2 while being displayed in a reduced size. In the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a5), it is shown that although it overlaps with the stage name display section ST2, it does not reach the predetermined display position (stock position). . In this case, since the notice icon I64 of the princess is not yet displayed on the stage name display section ST2, the explanation display of "the castle town stage" is displayed, and at least a part is displayed by the notice icon I64 of the princess. It is in a difficult-to-see state. The explanation display may be deleted before the notice icon overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2. Further, in the case of the notice icon according to the notice icon symbol CS (see FIG. 64), the explanation display is performed based on the trigger of the acquisition of the notice icon, for example, the explanation display is erased before overlapping with the stage name display section ST2. May be configured to be different from each other. Also, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display unit. Also, a pattern (so-called gusset) may be provided in which the advance notice icon is not acquired after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display unit ST2 and the advance notice icon may not be acquired. In this case, even if the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2, the explanation display may not be deleted (that is, in the case of the cassette pattern, the explanation display is not deleted, and it is true that In the true pattern in which the advance notice icon is acquired, for example, the description display may be erased when the bomb icon I61 is overlapped with the stage name display unit ST2. In this case, when the dark area is hidden, at least a part of the process up to the acquisition of the notice icon from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation, the execution of the case, is executed in the state where the dark effect is being executed. Specifically, after the bombing animation of the bomb icon I61 is started, the darkening effect is First, when the dark transition effect is finished and the UI unit is redisplayed, the notice icon is acquired (the explanation display disappears from the state in which the explanation display is displayed). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect may be performed, or both of the sound and the lamp effect may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (a6), when the princess advance notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display section ST2, “jojocho, which has been displayed so far, is displayed The description display of the "stage" is erased and functions as an area for displaying a notice icon exclusively. Therefore, in the upper part of the stage name display section ST2, character display of "STOCK" is performed. That is, according to this presentation example, when the advance notice icon is stocked in the stage name display section ST2, the display of the stage name is not performed. Note that the scene in which the advance notice icon is digested may overlap with the execution of the above-described darkening effect. In addition, when the notice icon is acquired, the moving means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the like) performs an effect of moving, whereby the movable means is the acquired notice icon And at least a part of the notice icons that have already been acquired (such as the whole of at least one notice icon among a plurality of notice icons, a part of one notice icon, etc.) You may In addition, the effect that the movable means is moved during at least a part of period from the start to the end of the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 is performed, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the movable means It is also good. That is, before the notice icon is displayed, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means, and after the notice icon is displayed, the notice of the notice display may be changed by the notice icon.

  Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" The stop display is performed in combination, and the display result of the off is decided. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 69 (a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the display of the first hold icon h11 The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a8), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. Be done. Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a8), the stage is changed with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the beach. That is, in this presentation example, even if the stage name display unit ST2 is in the non-display state, it is possible to change the stage, and when the stage name display unit ST2 is in the non-display state, It is not displayed. When the stage is changed, the stage name after the change may be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 for a predetermined time, and then the stage name may be erased and the notice icon may be displayed.

  FIG. 69 (a9) shows that five notice icons have been stocked. That is, although up to three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2, when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is erased and functions as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this presentation example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT4, the tutorial display (explanation display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a9), first, the notice icon I64 of the princess and two pseudo linked notice icons I65 are stocked in the stage name display unit ST2, and then the tutorial display unit In TT4, a warning icon I62 of swordsman and a notice icon I63 of chance improvement are stocked.

  In this presentation example, for example, when the notice icons are digested in order from the left side, an animation may be performed to change the display position of the notice icons other than the digested notice icons. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 69 (a9), when the princess advance notice icon I 64 is digested, two pseudo linked advance notice icons I 65 move to the left one by one, respectively, and a tutorial display is performed. The notice icon I62 for swordsman displayed on the left side of the section TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display section ST2, and the notice icon I63 for chance up displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the left one Do. When the notice icon displayed in the tutorial display unit TT4 moves to the stage name display unit ST2, the visibility of the other display may not be affected by instantaneous movement or the like.

  Then, when all the notice icons displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 are digested, the explanation display is resumed in the tutorial display section TT4, and all the notice icons displayed in the stage name display section ST2 are digested. In the case, the display of the stage name is resumed in the stage name display unit ST2. Note that the explanation display and the display of the stage name do not have to be resumed. The resumption of the explanation display may be resumed (for example, reopened after the super reach) within the same change display as the symbol change display in which the advance notice icon is digested. In addition, when the explanatory display is resumed, the exact same display may be resumed, or may be resumed from the display of a different part in the telop type (scroll type) display.

  Further, the type of notice icon to be displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the type of notice icon to be displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be determined in advance. In this case, when the notice icon is digested, the other notice icons may not be moved.

  In addition, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, or may be shorter than the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

  Further, in this example of the effect, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked in the stage name display section ST2, and when the stocked number becomes three, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is displayed as a tutorial display section Up to three more TT4 can be stocked, but if the number is first stocked in the tutorial display section TT4 and the number of stock is three, then the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is additionally 3 in the stage name display section ST2. It may be possible to stock up to one.

  Also, in this example, before the notice icon completely fits on the stage name display unit ST2 or the tutorial display unit TT4 (a part of the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 or a part of the tutorial display unit TT4 In the state), the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the advance notice icon is completely contained in the stage name display section ST2 or the tutorial display section TT4, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. In addition, immediately after starting to move upward at the time of digesting the advance notice icon, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. In addition, before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display unit ST2 or the tutorial display unit TT4, the explanation display is displayed, and immediately after starting to move upward when the notice icon is digested, the explanation display is displayed It may not be done.

  Further, in this presentation example, although the above-described one is shown as an example of the throwing animation as shown in FIG. 62, it is needless to say that it is possible to combine the modes shown in the other figures.

  In addition, in the embodiments described above and the embodiments described below, there may be, for example, a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be digested from now on, such as a variable icon display area.

  Also, the notice icons do not have to be displayed in the order in which they are digested. For example, even if a plurality of notice icons are digested into a tooth loss, another notice icon is moved so as to be filled in an empty place. You don't have to move.

  In addition, it is possible to distribute to the 1st special figure winning a prize opening and the 2nd special figure winning a prize opening per one starting mouth, in the normal game state it is possible to hold 8 design fluctuation displays, the so-called MAX 8 machines (8 In the case of a store-in-order machine), the display area for the hold icon display area is prepared in advance for four hold areas, and when the hold is four, the display area is expanded to five minutes. Or, it may be expanded up to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed on the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display unit ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

  FIG. 69 (b1) to FIG. 69 (b2) show the situation where the stock notice icon is digested.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon I63 of chance up is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In addition, the 1st decorative symbol and the 2nd decorative symbol are changing display.

  Then, at the timing when the advance notice icon I63 for chance up is digested, as shown in FIG. 68 (b2), the situation is shown that the advance notice icon I63 for chance up moves upward. In this example, even if at least a part of the notice icon overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2, even if the notice icon I63 of the chance up moves from the display position in the stage name display unit ST2, the explanation display is performed. The display of the stage name has not been resumed. The same applies to the tutorial display unit TT4. The display of the stage name may be resumed immediately after the advance notice icon has moved from the display position in the stage name display unit ST2.

  FIG. 70 shows in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect according to this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), "With notice icon digestion ..." is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb Is arranged.

  FIGS. 70A1 to 70A3 illustrate how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

  FIG. 70 (a1) shows the castle town stage. The display mode of the castle town stage is the same as the mode shown in FIG.

  FIG. 70 (a2) shows the appearance of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L in the space stage is different from the above-mentioned castle town stage in that a UI unit is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, in the UI section of the space stage, the variation icon display area is arranged at the lower center of the display screen, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in a manner mounted on a pedestal. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged side by side vertically. The display position of the stock notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon on the castle stage shown in FIG. 62 and described above. The hold icon display area is a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a2), since three variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon h11, h12 and h13 in the space stage is different from the display mode of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon of the castle town stage, and forms a pentagon. In the display form of the white pentagon, the display form of the pre-reading advance notice is, for example, the display form of a blue pentagon. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a2), the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the prefetch notice. It has become. In addition, in the tutorial display area TT1 disposed below the reserved icon display area, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Thus, in the space stage, since the display position of the notice icon and the display position of the tutorial display area TT1 are different, the tutorial display area TT1 is not overlapped by the notice icon.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper part of the display screen.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  FIG. 70 (a3) shows a state immediately after transition from another stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 70 (a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, the explanation display is not displayed, and the non-displayed state is maintained until a new explanation display is performed Be done. As shown in FIG. 70 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a warning icon I62 of swordsman is overlapped with the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. The instruction display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. In addition, when the tutorial display area TT1 is in a non-display state in a certain stage (for example, the castle town stage), when transitioning to another stage (for example, a space stage), the explanatory display is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition May be displayed.

  FIG. 70 (b1) to FIG. 70 (b2) show that the tutorial display area TT1 is erased when the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged in the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the notice icon is stocked. It is done.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (b1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The first hold icon h11 of the variation icon h0 and the two hold icons is in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (b1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed below the display screen, and "With notice icon digest ..." is displayed. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but in this case, the third icon The tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N is erased. Here, the button icon IBT can be stocked in a plurality, and is an icon for notifying in advance of the number of occurrences of the effect of operating the button during a specific effect, for example, the number of occurrences of the button operation effect is large It can be said that the greater the confidence against a big hit, that is, the more the stock of button icons IBT, the more likely it is a big hit.

  Thus, according to this presentation example, it can be said that performing the other display is sacrificed when the notice icon is displayed.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of effects of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 71 shows another example of rendering using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the above-mentioned character of the lord.

  FIGS. 71 (a1) to 71 (a6) show that the notice icon that has already been stocked is changed by the throwing animation.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center thereof In the left side of the variation icon h0, there is formed a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Although both the variation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1), "dono is a general Yatsushiro" is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (a1), a notice icon I66 of hatena is displayed (stocked) so as to overlap on the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before it is timed to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens even if it is digested. Sometimes it acts as a notice icon. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb Is arranged.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tonosama character is started, and it is shown that the Tonosama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. It is done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a3), it is shown that the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a4), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what has been displayed as "Don's grandfather is Yatsushiro" has been changed to "With notice icon digest ...".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord arrives at the notice icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has burst is superimposed on the front side of the notice icon I66 of Hatena, and at least a part of the notice icon I66 of Hatena is considered to be difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is at least as large as covering the notice icon I66 of Hatena. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon which is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a6), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and the notice icon I66 of Hatena changes to the notice icon I62 of the sword master. Then, the voice "Pakien" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the notice icon I66 of Hatena has been changed to the notice icon I62 of swordsman. At this time, since the warning icon I62 for swordsman is overlapped at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the instruction display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a6), what has been displayed as "in advance notice icon digestion ..." is changed to "Kengo is the enemy of the lord." The timing of changing the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the warning icon I62 for the swordsman is started, or from the timing at which the display of the notification icon I62 for the swordsman is started The timing may be earlier, or may be later than the timing at which the display of the warning icon I62 of the swordsman is started. In this way, it can be said that a part of stock presentation of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change presentation of the stocked notice icon.

  FIGS. 71 (b1) to (b3) show that the notice icon that has already been stocked is changed by the throwing animation. 71 (b1) is the same as FIG. 71 (a4), and FIG. 71 (b3) is the same as FIG. 71 (a6), so the description of these drawings is omitted. In the tutorial display section TT1 in FIG. 71 (b3), “With advance notice icon digestion ...” is displayed.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 71 (b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord arrives at the notice icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has burst is displayed overlapping on the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, at least a part of the notice icon I66 of the hatena and the tutorial display unit TT1 are considered to be difficult to view, and the overlapping range is larger than the effect image shown in FIG. 71 (a5). When a plurality of notice icons are stocked, all notice icons may be overlapped. In this way, it can be said that a part of stock presentation of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change presentation of the stocked notice icon.

  In FIG. 71 (c1) to FIG. 71 (c3), it is shown that the notice icon already stocked is changed by the throwing animation. 71 (c1) is the same as FIG. 71 (b1), and FIG. 71 (c2) is the same as FIG. 71 (b2), so the description of these drawings is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (c2), after the bomb icon I61 bursts, as shown in FIG. 71 (c3), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased and the notice icon I66 of Hatena notices the swordsman It has changed to the icon I 62 and the notice icon I 63 of chance up. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. Furthermore, in other words, it is possible to say that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the preview item is the same as at least a part of the effect of changing the stocked notice icon and stocking a new notice icon.

  FIGS. 71 (d1) to (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes by the throwing animation. Since FIG. 71 (d1) is the same as FIG. 71 (a4), the description of this drawing is omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 71 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 71 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tonosama character is a second hold icon h12 which is a display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. Reach and burst. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has burst is superimposed on the front side of the second hold icon h12, and at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is considered to be difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is at least as large as covering the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon which is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (d3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, the blue display mode changes to the red display mode )doing. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice “pong” to notify that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. In this way, it can be said that part of the stock effect of the advance notice item is the same as at least part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  As described above, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 71, at least a part of the animation at the time of acquiring the advance notice icon is the same as a part of the other animations. For example, when the display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, the third decorative symbol) The same applies to the animation performed on the display device 208N).

  FIG. 72 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of effects of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 72 (a1) to 72 (a7) show that a notification has been made that a mission has been achieved by displaying a notification icon as a result of stocking a specific notice icon. Note that FIG. 72 (a1) to FIG. 72 (a3) are the same as FIG. 62 (h) to FIG. 62 (j), so the description of these drawings is omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 72 (a3) is performed, as shown in FIG. 72 (a4), the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord ends. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the achievement display portion KM1 as an explanation display portion for notifying that a specific effect has been performed above the tutorial display portion TT1. It is displayed. The achievement display section KM1 displays "Kengo stock" indicating that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. That is, when the mission to acquire the warning icon I62 of swordsman is imposed, when the warning icon I62 for swords horse is stocked, notification of the achievement of the mission is indicated by displaying that effect on the achievement display unit KM1. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 may be displayed to explicitly notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 for prescribing that the expectation to the jackpot is extremely high is performed. It is also good. Note that the timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be simultaneous with the end of the throwing animation, or may be a timing before the throwing animation ends, or after the throwing animation has ended It may be timing. In addition, since the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stocked warning notice icon I62 of the sword sword, the achievement display unit KM1 may be able to be noticed. The notice icon to be stocked may be displayed overlapping on the achievement display unit KM1.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the "decoration C" as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decorative 1-decorative C-decorative" A temporary stop is displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of 6 ". The fluctuation icon h0 is deleted here, but may be displayed.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 72 (a6) to FIG. 72 (a7), the notice icon I63 of chance up from the notice icon symbol CS is displayed. It jumps out toward the display position on the right of the swordsman notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (a6), the advance notice icon I63 of chance increase overlaps the front side of the achievement display portion KM1, making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the explanation display in the achievement display portion KM1.

  In this presentation example, for example, when the notice icon is stocked, the display position of the notice icon is determined in advance by the type of the notice icon, the achievement display unit KM1 according to the kind of the notice icon to be digested. It is also possible to eliminate the overlap. Also, for example, in the case where a plurality of notice icons are stocked and when the remaining notice icons are moved to align at a predetermined interval by digesting the notice icons, one of the notice icons is selected. When the predetermined number of notice icons are digested, the overlap to the achievement display unit KM1 by the notice icons may be eliminated.

  In FIGS. 72 (b1) to 72 (b3), for example, an example of the operation mode of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operating at the time of development to a super reach or becoming a big hit is It is shown.

  FIG. 72 (b1) shows that super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background screen of the super reach is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. . Note that, as described above, the UI unit frames out downward at the time of super reach. Therefore, the display position of the fluctuation icon h0 is lower than when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper part of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, while the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed above the display screen, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the special view 1 and the special view 2 The fourth symbol is also displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide in the direction in which they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There is a case. According to this, due to the phenomenon in which the movable operation by the decorative symbol display device and the explanation display are hidden, it may be possible to pay attention to the explanation display while giving a sense of expectation for a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are adjacent to each other, are integrated to be along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It rotates 90 degrees clockwise. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed at the left end of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and The image to which the character of "holiday" was given in the frame is also displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display unit 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 and the fourth symbol of the special view 1 and the special view 2 are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (b3), the family crest 224E disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and overlies the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The eight generation character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which have been wrapped and arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, move downward to overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There is a case. In addition, when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the character may be overlapped with the Yatsushiro character 224Fa or the general character 224Fb. In addition, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be overlapped with the family crest 224E. According to this, due to the phenomenon in which the movable operation by the decorative symbol display device or the effect movable body and the explanation display are hidden, it may be possible to pay attention to the explanation display while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  In (c1) to (c4) of FIG. 72, the button image 136a is displayed constantly or for at least a fixed period in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed. A state of informing the state is shown.

  FIG. 72 (c1) shows that the animation of the duel scene in the sword strike is being performed. FIG. 72 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 63 (d), but the stage name display portion ST1 is displayed not at the second decorative symbol display device 208M but at the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, The difference is that the button image 136a is displayed constantly or at least for a fixed period of time below the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in the normal state (the default display state).

  In FIG. 72 (c2), animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (c2), the button reception time meter is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208L, and the button image is displayed. The display mode of 136 a is displayed in a display mode prompting the user to press the effect button 136. This display notifies that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and promotes the operation of the effect button 136 to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that the operation reception state is received.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (c3), as shown in FIG. 72 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L The cut-in image to which the character display of “Z” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode on the assumption that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this presentation example, as described above, for example, as described above, when the operation of the button preview icon (the first button preview icon I4 or the second button preview icon I11) becomes effective, as described above. In some cases, the player may be prompted to operate the effect button 136.

  FIG. 72 (d) shows an example of the notice icon applicable in the present embodiment. For example, in addition to Hatena's notice icon I66 described above, pseudo-linked notice icon I65, chance-up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, hold promotion notice icon I67, chance eye notice icon I68 The panda notice icon I69 is prepared. Here, the warning icon I67 for promoting holding is an icon for notifying that the display mode of the holding icon or the variation icon is changed to a display mode with a higher degree of reliability for a big hit when it is digested. In addition, the pseudo-series notice icon is an icon for predicting that the simulated series effect will be performed when it is digested. Further, the notice icon I68 of chance eye is an icon for giving notice that the chance eye is derived as the display result of the decorative symbol when it is digested. In addition, the notice icon of the princess is an icon for giving notice of transition to the pre-reading zone when it is digested. Also, the panda's notice icon I69 is an icon for giving notice that the panda intrudes into an effect when it is digested, and that a big hit will surely be made.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the advance notice icon and the tutorial display.

  FIGS. 73 (a1) to 73 (a7) show that the instruction display (for example, the display of "The swordsman is the enemy's enemy") displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is scrolled. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 73, the left side is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of swordsman.

  FIG. 73 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanation display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display of “The sword is the enemy of the lord” is sequentially scrolled in from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a2), only the portion of "Kenou wa" is scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a3), only the portion of "Kenwa wa Toronori" is scrolled in There is. In these cases, since none of the characters overlap the warning icon I62 of the swordsman, there may be cases where the explanation display can be clearly recognized.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a4), the entire text “Kenryo is your lord” is displayed. In this case, at least the character portion of "Kengo" is overlapped with the predator icon I62 of the Kendo, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state in which it is difficult to view.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a5), the part “Ken-A-Wa” scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display section TT1, and the part “The lord of the lord” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of "Hondon-sama" is overlapped with the warning icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state in which it is difficult to view.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a6), the part “Kenryo wa Tonosama” scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display section TT1, and the section “It is a enemy” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of "in the enemy" is overlapped with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a7), the scrolling of the explanation display ends. As described above, in this effect example, the characters overlapped by the advance notice icon are continuously changed by the scroll of the explanation display. In addition, the scrolling of the explanation display results in a period in which the explanation display is overlapped by the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display is not overlapped. In addition, when scrolling the explanation display is repeated, these periods also occur repeatedly.

  FIGS. 73 (b1) to (b7) show another example in the tutorial display section TT1 during the scroll display of the explanatory display (for example, the display of “The sword is the lord of the lord”) displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. The situation in the case where the display (for example, the notice display of "superheat") is performed is shown. 73 (b1) to 73 (b3) and 73 (b6) to 73 (b7) respectively correspond to FIGS. 73 (a1) to 73 (a3) and 73 (a6) to 73 (b). As it is the same as FIG. (A7), the detailed description is omitted.

  After the explanatory display is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 73 (b3), as shown in FIG. 73 (b4) to FIG. 73 (b5), a notice display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The notice display changes the color of the base of the tutorial display section TT1 to red, and displays the letters "superheat", etc., and performs a notice display or a prefetch notice display in the symbol variation display. While the advance notice is displayed, the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted. For example, the notice display may be overlapped with the explanation display to make it difficult to visually recognize the explanation display, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

  After that, when the advance notice display ends, as shown in FIG. 73 (b6), the scroll display of the explanation display resumes. The scroll display of the explanation display proceeds in the background even during the period when the advance notice display is performed, and the display mode of the explanation display at the time when the display of the explanation display is resumed is the display after progressing in the background It is an aspect. In addition, the display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is resumed may be the display mode when it is interrupted. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (b7), the scroll display of the explanation display ends. Although the advance notice display has been described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

  Fig. 73 (c1) to (c5) show an explanatory display (for example, the display of "The swordsman is the enemy's enemy") displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 in a state where multiple notice icons are stocked. During display, it is shown that the other notice icons move as the notice icons are digested.

  In FIG. 73 (c1), the notice icon I63 for chance up, which is the notice icon to be digested first, and the notice icon I62 for swordsman, the notice icon to be digested second, is the notice icon I63 for chance up. It is arranged side by side on the right side, and it is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is overlapped on the left side of the tutorial display section TT1. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (c2), when the notice icon I63 of chance up is digested, as shown in FIG. 73 (c3) to FIG. 73 (c5), the notice icon I62 of swordsman is up chance The notice icon moving animation is performed to move to the position where the notice icon I63 was displayed. As a result, after the range of the overlap with respect to the tutorial display unit TT1 according to the warning icon I62 of the sword player changes continuously, the overlap state is released and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is easy to see May be That is, in the example of the effect, the preview icon does not overlap or does not overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 depending on the number of stocked preview icons. When the instruction display is scrolled in the tutorial display unit TT1, the movement display of the notice icon in the movement animation of the notice icon may overlap with the scroll display of the explanation display.

In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]"
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
Notice means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of notices [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the game stand frame lamp 542 and the like] ,
A game console equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a pending display [eg, a pending icon etc.],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notice icons.
The hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1, the hold icon display area of the special view 2, the variation icon display area 280, etc.] in the image display means.
The said pending | holding display is a display according to the number (Hereafter, it is called "the number of pending | holding.") For which the operation | movement of the said symbol variation display is suspended. A number of pending icons are displayed for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is pending, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 etc.] in the image display means,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more notice icons [for example, the notice icon display area 285 is formed of a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6 , Each area is configured to be able to display the notice icon],
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. If the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-sequence effect may be executed, and if the one-two box notice icon I9 is digested, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
During a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, a first notice icon [for example, a hat notice icon I6 or the like] of the plurality of kinds of notice icons is a first number [for example, two, etc. When the second number [for example, three etc] which is larger than the first number is digested, it is configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when it is digested.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of an effect may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game console, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a possibility that the notice icon may be digested, so the player pays attention to the display within the hold. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the user from missing the notice corresponding to the notice icon.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and the consumption of the advance notice icon.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of being executed other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol fluctuation display, or may not execute symbol fluctuation display.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of notices, or may be capable of being executed other than the plurality of types of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of types of notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of notices.

  In addition, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display, or may be capable of display other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display or may not display the hold display.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in addition to the hold display area in the image display means.

  Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be, for example, characters, numbers, or symbols.

  Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

  In addition, the symbol variation display may be started only when the holding is digested, or may be started other than when the holding is digested. The symbol variation display may be started whenever the retention is digested, or may not be initiated when the retention is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may be displayed other than the notice icon display area of the image display means. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or more notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than one or more notice icons. In addition, the notice icon display area may display one or more notice icons or may not display one or more notice icons.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice other than the notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon may be executable. Further, the notice means may execute a notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the type of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed [eg, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is A notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since it is possible to expect the number of times to execute the notice displayed from the change displayed as the notice icon to the digested change, it is possible to play the game so that the player does not miss the notice display. There are cases where you can

  Here, the notice icon may display only the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or a number other than the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. Further, the notice icon may always display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or does not display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed. There may be.

In addition, "the above-mentioned notice means is a false notice of the same mode as the mode of the above-mentioned notice [for example, a pseudo-series effect or reach transition effect etc. to be a big hit] A viable means,
The notice means is a type of notice icon which is digested when one notice icon [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a box of notice icons I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. A means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition presentation, etc., which is to be lost],
After the false announcement is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be disjointed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to feel tense until the notice icon is digested and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only the false notice of the same aspect as the aspect of the notice, or may be other than the false notice of the same aspect as the aspect of the notice. May be In addition, the notice means may always carry out a false notice of the same mode as the mode of the notice, or may not carry out a false notice of the same mode as the mode of the notice.

  Further, even if the notice means is capable of executing only the false notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, other than the false notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon may be executable. . In addition, the notice means may execute a false notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. In the case where one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, there may be a case where a false notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon is not executed.

  In addition, after the false announcement is executed, the result of the symbol variation indication may be configured to be always disjoint, or after the false announcement is executed, the result of the symbol variation indication may be a big hit. It may be.

  In addition, there may be a case where a notice with a high probability that a big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means may be executed after a false notice is executed.

In addition, during the period during which the one symbol variation display is being performed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is greater than the third number [eg, one, etc.] The fourth number [eg, three etc.] larger than the number of three is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to pay attention to the number at which the notice icon is displayed in the symbol change display.

In addition, it is equipped with “hold display means capable of executing display according to the hold number [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, effect hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display unit is a display unit different from the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the display of the hold display and the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of executing only the display according to the number of holdings, or may be capable of executing other than the display according to the number of holdings. Further, the hold display means may always execute display according to the hold number, or may not execute display according to the hold number.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game console, the hold display may be clearly recognized.

  Here, the holding display means may be configured by only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include other than the light emitting means (for example, the image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. In addition, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a single package may include a plurality of LEDs such as a full color LED. Moreover, it may be configured by a single color LED.

  In addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the emission operation notification means for notifying the operation of the emission operation means may be realized by the light emission means.

In addition, "prediction notice means capable of executing pre-notice notice [for example, decoration symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The pre-reading advance notice means is a means capable of executing the pre-reading advance notice by displaying the pre-notification icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the notice icon, there may be a case where the expectation to the big hit can be enhanced.

  Here, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing only pre-reading notice, or may be capable of executing other than pre-reading notice. In addition, the pre-reading notice means may always carry out the pre-reading notice or may not carry out the pre-reading notice.

  Further, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing pre-reading notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by any means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. It may be possible to execute pre-reading notice. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter,“ the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold being the prefetching target shown in FIG. 19 (2), etc.] The notice icon may be digested a fifth number [eg, three etc.] during the period in which the
The symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-read objects shown in FIG. 19 (2) are executed before the second symbol variation display is executed. In the period when the symbol variation display etc. based on the suspension suspended before the eye suspension is executed)), the above-mentioned notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, one etc.] Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol change display is being held while the first symbol change display is being performed [eg, in FIG. 19 (4) During a period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of the read-ahead shown is being executed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the target of the read-ahead is It is displayed in the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the number of digests of the notice icons differs between the case of symbol variation display to be read ahead and the case of symbol variation display executed before the symbol change display to be read ahead. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to make the symbol variation display to be noticed by the player easy to understand.

  Here, during the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed In, the notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. Moreover, in the period when the second symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be necessarily digested by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variation display is being performed The preview icon may not be digested by the fifth number.

  In addition, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. In addition, during the period when the first symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be necessarily digested by the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variation display is being performed The advance notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

  In addition, the suspension display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol fluctuation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol fluctuation display is being executed, or the first In the period in which the symbol variation display is being performed, it may be possible to notify other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the suspension display may always notify that the operation of the second symbol fluctuation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol fluctuation display is being executed, or the first symbol may be displayed. It may not be notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the variation display is being performed.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during a period in which the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as" fourth symbol change display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being performed [eg, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the hat display of the notice icon I6 of hat and the increase display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the 1000 box and the notice icon I10 of the fan are lines in one symbol variation display. Being etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display where the notice icon is digested, the player may be expected to have an expectation until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be always started to be displayed, or during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the notification icon is The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start being displayed only during the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be started during a period other than the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  The notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested.

In addition, during the period in which the “symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ third symbol variation display ”) to be executed before the“ fourth symbol variation display ”is executed, the fourth The notice icon to be digested may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being performed [for example, the notice icon I6 for the hat to be digested at the timing shown in FIG. It is displayed increasing during execution of the symbol variation display which is executed earlier than etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only when the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon to be digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to be started to be displayed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notification icon to be digested may be started to be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In addition, during the period when the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be configured to be always started to be displayed, or In a period in which three symbol variation displays are being performed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may not start to be displayed.

  In addition, it is not necessary to start display of the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

Also, “the pending display area is an area where the pending display can be displayed up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.],
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the number of possible displays of the hold display and the number of possible display of the notice icon are different, the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display area may always display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  In addition, the advance notice icon display area may display advance notice icons up to the eighth number or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of the hold display and the maximum displayable number of the advance notice icons may be the same.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of notice icons may be larger than the displayable maximum number of the hold display of the special view 1 or may be the same or at least the same.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of notice icons may be larger than the displayable maximum number of the hold display of the special view 2, or may be at least the same or the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the sum of the displayable maximum numbers of the special display 1 and the special display 2 and may be at least the same or the same.

In addition, “reproduction means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, the decoration symbol display device 208, the speaker 210, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamps 532 Etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. (50) or FIG.
One of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice [eg, stage change effect shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) or FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice is a different notice from the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIG. 22 (51) to FIG. (57) or FIG. Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the background of the moon surface, etc.],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect is performed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect is to be performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it is possible to know in advance the content of the effect to be executed, so it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Here, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of rendering, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of rendering. Further, the rendering means may always execute a plurality of types of rendering, or may not execute a plurality of types of rendering.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be notices other than the first notice and the second notice. The notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  Also, the rendering means may be capable of executing only the first rendering and the second rendering, or may be capable of executing the rendering other than the first rendering and the second rendering. . In addition, the effect means may always execute the first effect and the second effect or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

  In addition, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that effects other than the first effect are executed. . In addition, the first advance notice may always notify that the first effect is performed, or may not notify that the first effect is performed.

  In addition, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is performed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is performed. . In addition, the second advance notice may always notify that the second effect is performed, or may not notify that the second effect is performed.

Also, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested [eg, for example, FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. 23 (66), FIG. 31 (1) to As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased advance notice icons are all digested, etc.], and the game table is characterized. "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the display of the notice icon is always executed, the player's sense of expectation may be able to be improved.

Also, “The game console is a pachinko machine [eg pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [eg, first special view display device 212, second special view display device 214, etc.]”
A second display means [for example, a combination of the decoration symbol display device 208, the decoration symbol display device 208 and the first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 or the effect holding lamp 286];
A game console equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [eg pseudo-series effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variation effect, etc.] And
The second display means holds a display according to the number of times the operation of the symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter referred to as the “number of reservations”). Display means capable of displaying on the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2, the variation icon display area 280, the reserved display area of the reserve lamp 286 for effect, etc.] [for example, in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 A number of pending icons are displayed for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is pending, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that is started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 etc.] of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more notice icons [for example, the notice icon display area 285 is formed of a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6 , Each area is configured to be able to display the notice icon],
The second display means is a display capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested It is a means [for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-series effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of the one and two box is digested, the reach transition effect is executed There is a case etc],
A second number [eg, three, etc.] digested that is larger than the first number during the period when one symbol variation display is being executed, rather than the first number if the advance notice icon is digested. It is configured to be more likely to be a big hit if it is
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of an effect may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game console, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a possibility that the notice icon may be digested, so the player pays attention to the display within the hold. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the user from missing the notice corresponding to the notice icon.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and the consumption of the advance notice icon.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of being executed other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may have a display capable of displaying in addition to the plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of reservations only in the suspension display area, or may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of reservations other than the suspension display area It may be. Furthermore, the second display means may display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area without fail, and may not display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area .

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be startable except when the hold is digested. Also, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the retention is digested, or may not be initiated even if the retention is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may be displayed other than the notice icon display area of the second display means. Good. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or more notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than one or more notice icons. In addition, the notice icon display area may display one or more notice icons or may not display one or more notice icons.

  Further, the second display means can display only the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display other than the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested can be displayed. It is also good. Further, the second display means always displays, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, there may be a case where the notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon is not displayed.

Also, the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 Notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since it is possible to expect the number of times to display the notice display displayed from the change at which the notice icon is displayed to the change which is digested, the game is performed so that the player does not miss the notice display. You may be able to

  Here, the notice icon may display only the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed Other items may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or displays a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. May not do.

Also, "the second display means is a fake notice display of the same form as the form of the advance notice display [for example, a pseudo-sequence effect or reach transition effect that will be a big hit, etc.] Display means capable of displaying transition effects etc.,
The second display means is a display that has been digested when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 for hat, the notice icon I 9 for a box, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means capable of displaying the false notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, pseudo-run notice or reach transition effect etc. to be lost],
After the false advance notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be uncovered.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the player may be tense until the notice icon is digested and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode, or other than the false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode. May also be displayable. In addition, the second display means may display a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode, or may not display a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode. It may be.

  Also, the second display means can display only the type of false notice display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It may be displayed, and when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, it is possible to display other than the false notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon It may be Further, the second display means always displays a false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. If there is one warning icon displayed in the notice icon display area, it may not be displayed a false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the warning icon that has been digested. .

  In addition, the result of the symbol variation display may be configured to be always disjointed after the false notice display is displayed, or the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit after the false notice display is displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, after a false advance notice display is displayed, there may be a case where a notice display having a high possibility of displaying a big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.

In addition, during the period during which the one symbol variation display is being performed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is greater than the third number [eg, one, etc.] The fourth number [eg, three etc.] larger than the number of three is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to pay attention to the number at which the notice icon is displayed in the symbol change display.

"The second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means, and
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One display means of the plurality of display means is a reserve display means [for example, the first special view reserve lamp 218, the second special view reserve lamp 220, the effect reserve lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the hold number in the hold display area [for example, the hold lamp of the number according to the hold number, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The hold display unit is a display unit different from the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the display of the hold display and the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the second display unit may be configured by two display units, or may be configured by three or more display units.

  Further, the second display means may be configured only by the image display means and the hold display means, or may be configured to include other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be one in which the image display means and the hold display means are necessarily configured, or may not constitute at least one of the image display means and the hold display means.

  Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. The hold display means may be configured to include the hold display area without fail, or may not include the hold display area.

  Also, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of hold other than the hold display area It is also good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display according to the hold number in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the hold number in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variation display of the decorative symbol or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the hold display may be clearly recognized.

  Here, the holding display means may be configured by only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include other than the light emitting means (for example, the image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. In addition, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a single package may include a plurality of LEDs such as a full color LED. Moreover, it may be configured by a single color LED.

  In addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the emission operation notification means for notifying the operation of the emission operation means may be realized by the light emission means.

Also, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]"
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the hold number.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the variation display of the decorative symbol and the holding icon are displayed on the same image display means, it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holdings while visually recognizing the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the image display means may always display the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the variation display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, "prediction notice means capable of executing pre-notice notice [for example, decoration symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The pre-reading advance notice means is a means capable of executing the pre-reading advance notice by displaying the pre-notification icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the notice icon, there may be a case where the expectation to the big hit can be enhanced.

  Here, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing only pre-reading notice, or may be capable of executing other than pre-reading notice. In addition, the pre-reading notice means may always carry out the pre-reading notice or may not carry out the pre-reading notice.

  Further, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing pre-reading notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by any means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. It may be possible to execute pre-reading notice. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter,“ the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold being the prefetching target shown in FIG. 19 (2), etc.] The notice icon may be digested a fifth number [eg, three etc.] during the period in which the
The symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-read objects shown in FIG. 19 (2) are executed before the second symbol variation display is executed. In the period when the symbol variation display etc. based on the suspension suspended before the eye suspension is executed)), the above-mentioned notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, one etc.] Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for informing that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during a period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed [for example, FIG. It corresponds to the second hold that is the target of read-ahead during the period when the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of the read-ahead indicated in (4) is being executed The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 and the like], and the like. "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the number of digests of the notice icons differs between the case of symbol variation display to be read ahead and the case of symbol variation display executed before the symbol change display to be read ahead. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to make the symbol variation display to be noticed by the player easy to understand.

  Here, during the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed In, the notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. Moreover, in the period when the second symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be necessarily digested by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variation display is being performed The preview icon may not be digested by the fifth number.

  In addition, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. In addition, during the period when the first symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be necessarily digested by the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variation display is being performed The advance notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

  Moreover, the display according to the number of reservations may be able to notify only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed. During the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed, it may be possible to notify other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the display according to the number of reservations may always notify that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed, In the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed, there may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during a period in which the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as" fourth symbol change display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being performed [eg, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the hat display of the notice icon I6 of hat and the increase display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the 1000 box and the notice icon I10 of the fan are lines in one symbol variation display. Being etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display where the notice icon is digested, the player may be expected to have an expectation until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be always started to be displayed, or during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the notification icon is The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start being displayed only during the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be started during a period other than the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  The notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested.

In addition, during the period in which the “symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ third symbol variation display ”) to be executed before the“ fourth symbol variation display ”is executed, the fourth The notice icon to be digested may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being performed [for example, the notice icon I6 for the hat to be digested at the timing shown in FIG. It is displayed increasing during execution of the symbol variation display which is executed earlier than etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only when the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon to be digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to be started to be displayed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notification icon to be digested may be started to be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In addition, during the period when the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be configured to be always started to be displayed, or In a period in which three symbol variation displays are being performed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may not start to be displayed.

  In addition, it is not necessary to start display of the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

“The hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display according to the hold number up to a seventh number (eg, four or eight, etc.),
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of the display according to the number of reservations and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display area may always display the display according to the hold number up to the seventh number, or even if the display according to the hold number may not be displayed up to the seventh number Good.

  In addition, the advance notice icon display area may display advance notice icons up to the eighth number or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of displays according to the number of reservations may be the same as the displayable maximum number of notice icons.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of notice icons may be larger than the displayable maximum number of the display according to the number of reservations of the special view 1, or may be at least the same or the same.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of notice icons may be larger than the displayable maximum number of the display according to the number of reservations of the special view 2, or at least it may be the same.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable maximum number of notice icons may be greater than the sum of the maximum number of displayable numbers of displays according to the number of reservations of Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2, or at least the same Good.

In addition, “reproduction means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, the decoration symbol display device 208, the speaker 210, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamps 532 Etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effect shown in FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. (50) or FIG. 34 (49)],
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a second preview display [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) or FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIG. 22 (51) to FIG. (57) or FIG. 34 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the background of the moon surface, etc.],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first preliminary display is a preliminary display for notifying that the first effect is performed,
The game stand characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display notifying that the second effect is performed. "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it is possible to know in advance the content of the effect to be executed, so it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Here, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of rendering, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of rendering. Further, the rendering means may always execute a plurality of types of rendering, or may not execute a plurality of types of rendering.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, and also displays notices other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. In addition, the second display means may display the first notice display and the second notice display without fail, and may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. It is also good.

  Also, the rendering means may be capable of executing only the first rendering and the second rendering, or may be capable of executing the rendering other than the first rendering and the second rendering. . In addition, the effect means may always execute the first effect and the second effect or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

  In addition, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that effects other than the first effect are executed. Good. In addition, the first advance notice display may always notify that the first effect is performed, or may not notify that the first effect is performed.

  In addition, the second advance notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that effects other than the second effect are executed. Good. In addition, the second advance notice may always notify that the second effect is to be performed, or may not notify that the second effect is to be performed.

Also, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested [eg, for example, FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. 23 (66), FIG. 31 (1) to As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased advance notice icons are all digested, etc.], and the game table is characterized. "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the display of the notice icon is always executed, the player's sense of expectation may be able to be improved.

Also, “The game console is a pachinko machine [eg pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon functions as a pre-reading notice, but may be separately displayable from the pre-reading notice. Alternatively, the display of the advance notice icon may be different from that displayed in the pre-reading mode. For example, the notice icon may be increased or digested even in the normal background display, and the notice icon may be increased or digested even while executing a special background mode for prefetching. It is also good.

  Also, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, and when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or c is displayed and the notice icon C is displayed. When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice display a is digested when the notice c is displayed. It is a display that is displayed in the case where it is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested, “pattern for displaying notice display b, notice display c or notice display d The jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when "the symbol variation display in which the advance notice a is displayed" is performed than when the "variation display" is performed. The notice display b is a display displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is digested, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is digested. It is a display, and it is easier for a big hit symbol to be displayed more clearly when "the symbol variation display with the advance notice display b displayed" is executed than "the symbol variation display with the notice display c displayed" is executed. May be configured. The notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (A, B, D) are digested, and the notice icon C is Once digested, any one of the notice display b, notice display c or notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is finalized and displayed when "the notice icon A, the notice icon B or the notice icon D is digested" is executed rather than the "figure change display in which the notice icon C is digested" is executed. It may be configured to be easy. In addition, rather than the “pattern change display in which the advance notice display d is displayed” is executed, the one that “indication change in which the notice display a, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed” is executed is the big hit symbol It may be configured to be easily determined and displayed.

Also, in the above description,
[First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, first special view display device 212, second special view display device 214, etc.];
A second display means [for example, a combination of the decoration symbol display device 208, the decoration symbol display device 208 and the first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 or the effect holding lamp 286];
A game console equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [eg pseudo-series effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variation effect, etc.] And
The second display means holds a display according to the number of times the operation of the symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter referred to as the “number of reservations”). Display means capable of displaying on the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2, the variation icon display area 280, the reserved display area of the reserve lamp 286 for effect, etc.] [for example, in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 A number of pending icons are displayed for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is pending, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that is started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 etc.] of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is constituted by a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6, Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested. If the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-sequence effect may be executed, and if the one-two box notice icon I9 is digested, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
During a period in which one of the symbol variation display is being executed, a second number [greater than the first number when the advance notice icon is digested by the first number [for example, one, etc.] For example, it is configured to be more likely to be a big hit if it is digested, etc.
The second display means is based on the third change of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [e.g., the object of prefetching shown in FIG. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a prefetch notice notice before the start of symbol variation display etc.).
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

Also, the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 Notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the second display means is a fake notice display of the same form as the form of the notice display [for example, a pseudo-series effect or reach transition effect that will be a big hit, etc.] Display means capable of displaying transition effects etc.,
The second display means is a display that has been digested when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 for hat, the notice icon I 9 for a box, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means capable of displaying the false notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, pseudo-run notice or reach transition effect etc. to be lost],
After the false advance notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be uncovered.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

[The second display means is composed of a plurality of display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view holding lamp 218, the second special view holding lamp 220, the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] The displayed means,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one display means among the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One display means of the plurality of display means is a reserve display means [for example, the first special view reserve lamp 218, the second special view reserve lamp 220, the effect reserve lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the hold number in the hold display area [for example, the hold lamp of the number according to the hold number, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (9) to FIG. 20 (20), the notice icon is displayed as a preview notice. Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
The hold display unit is a display unit different from the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],”
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the hold number.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, during the period when “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the object of pre-reading shown in FIG. May be digested a fifth number [eg, three etc],
The symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-read objects shown in FIG. 19 (2) are executed before the second symbol variation display is executed. In the period when the symbol variation display etc. based on the suspension suspended before the eye suspension is executed)), the above-mentioned notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, one etc.] Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for informing that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during a period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed [for example, FIG. It corresponds to the second hold that is the target of read-ahead during the period when the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of the read-ahead indicated in (4) is being executed The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 and the like], and the like. "
I also explained about

In addition, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be pre-read [for example, FIG. 19 (1) As shown in FIG. 23 (66) and FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icon is completely digested until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notification icon is digested is executed, the notification icon may be started to be displayed [eg, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the hat display of the notice icon I6 of hat and the increase display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the 1000 box and the notice icon I10 of the fan are lines in one symbol variation display. Being etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, during the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the fourth symbol variation display is being performed while the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. The display of the notice icon may be started [For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat to be digested at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (C) is during the execution of the symbol variation display which is executed before the symbol variation display. It is displayed increasing, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“The hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display according to the hold number up to a seventh number [eg four or eight, etc.],
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “reproduction means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, the decoration symbol display device 208, the speaker 210, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the game stand frame lamp 542 Etc.],
As the notice icon, a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I9 of a box and the like shown in FIG. 22 (47) or FIG. 33 (47)] can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 of a ribbon shown in FIG. 29 (Ab) and the like] can be displayed,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effect shown in FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. (50) or FIG. 34 (49)],
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a second preview display [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) or FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is displayed.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIG. 22 (51) to FIG. (57) or FIG. 34 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the background of the moon surface, etc.],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first preliminary display is a preliminary display for notifying that the first effect is performed,
The game stand characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display notifying that the second effect is performed. "
I also explained about

Also, “main control means [eg, main control unit 300 etc.]”;
Effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.]
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, etc.],
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One of the display types is a notice icon,
While displaying the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the third hold which is the target of the pre-reading shown in FIG. 19 (2)], the notice icon The display of the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 etc.] may be started as [For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (9), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed on the notice icon display area 285. Etc.],
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [eg, FIG. 19 (9) to FIG. 20 As shown in (14), even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (14), it is not digested etc. at the timing shown in FIG. ],
The symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol based on the third hold being the object of pre-reading shown in FIG. 19 (2) In the display of the first symbol variation display, the first notice icon which has not been digested may be digested. 9) to FIG. 20 (25), the notice icon I6 of the hat started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9), as shown in FIG. Digested in
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

In addition, the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, a hat notification icon The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested, etc. in the symbol variation display where the display of I6 is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, as the preview notice of the second symbol variation display, the display of the first notice icon may be started during the display of the first symbol variation display [eg, FIG. As shown in FIG. 20 (25), the symbol variation which is the target of prefetching so that the notice icon I6 of the hat started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed as a notice of reading a display etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, during the display of “one pattern change display,” a second number [for example, three etc.] than when the first number [for example, one etc.] of the first notice icon is digested. If the first notice icon of] is digested, it is likely to be a big hit,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10, etc.] can be displayed as“ the notice icon ”.
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the symbol variation display that has been digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 23 (60) to FIG. (66), the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested And the result of the symbol variation display is a big hit etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display [for example, pseudo-sequence effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach shift effect, premier notice effect, re-change effect, etc.] ,
When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 etc.] is digested, the first notice display as the notice display [for example, the pseudo shown in FIG. 21 (28) to FIG. Reproduction etc. may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display [for example, a pseudo-series effect or reach transition effect that becomes off, etc.],
When the first notice icon [for example, hat notice icon I6 etc.] is digested, the first false notice table [for example, false consecutive effect etc. to be missed] indication is displayed as the false notice display. In some cases,
The display mode of the first false preview display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first preview display,
In the symbol variation display where the first false notice display is displayed, it is configured to be a gap,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is pre-reading effect display [for example, the effect of pre-reading mode which is an effect to be transferred to a special stage shown in FIG. 18 (b), etc.],
A third notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 of a ribbon, etc.] can be displayed as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, the pre-reading effect display may be started [for example, if one ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, The effect is that the background shifts to the pre-reading mode, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the display means is constituted by a plurality of display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view holding lamp 218, the second special view holding lamp 220, the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] Is
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of a decorative symbol is performed, etc.] Is
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, based on the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, based on a hold that is three prior to the hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 19 (9) The notice icon I6 of the hat whose display has been started during the symbol variation display is configured to be necessarily digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [e.g. In the symbol variation display based on, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 etc.] in the display unit,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is constituted by a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.]” is provided.
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “main control means [eg, main control unit 300 etc.]”;
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, etc.];
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display may be a notice icon [eg, notice icons shown in FIG. 18 (a) and FIG. 18 (b), notice icon I21 of "house", notice icon I22 of "print". , "Hail" notice icon I31, "Hime" notice icon I32, "爺" notice icon I33],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
Big hit symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that becomes the big hit based on the second suspension of pre-reading shown in FIG. 41 (1)] During the period from when the second symbol variation display is ended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started. There is a case [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 to FIG. 42, "house" is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a period from when the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is suspended to the end of the symbol variation display. Notice icon I21 and notice icon I22 of "print" are displayed, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (23) to FIG. 21 (32), a hat If the notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-link may be made, and as shown in FIG. 22 (46) to FIG. May be started etc],
The first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed [for example, the combination of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "print" shown in FIG. 41] changes by one symbol By being digested in the display, the first effect display [for example, the effect image etc. displayed in the family crest fall effect shown in FIG. 42 (21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game stand characterized by

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game console, it may be possible to continue to have an expectation that the first effect display may be displayed until the first combination notification icon is digested.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible to show a plurality of notice icons in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is started, and to give a feeling of expectation to the big hit There is a possibility.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may display the notice icon without fail or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a pre-reading notice display, or may be other than being displayed as a pre-reading notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, there may be a case where only display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started. In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended after the second symbol variation display is suspended.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. Display other than the effect display corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the effect indication corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed in some cases, and when the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. The effect display corresponding to may not be displayed.

  In addition, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of preliminary announcement icons is digested in one symbol variation display, only the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display. It is configured that the first combination of a plurality of displayed advance notice icons is digested in one symbol change display, and a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as the effect display. It may be done. In addition, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is always displayed as the effect display. The first combination display may be not displayed as one of the presentation effects as the first combination of the plurality of displayed advance notice icons is digested in one time the symbol variation display.

  In addition, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is configured to be displayed as the first effect display as the effect display only by being digested in one symbol variation display It is configured that the first effect display is displayed as the effect display even if the first combination of the plurality of displayed advance notice icons is digested in one symbol change display. It may be done.

Also, “the first combination is a combination consisting of a first number [for example, two etc.] of the notice icons,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the first effect display is displayed until one notice icon of the first combination of the first number notice icons is displayed and the first number notice icons are digested. It may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that it may be displayed.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [eg, notice icon I21 of“ house ”and the like” and a second notice icon [eg, notice icon I22 of “print”, etc.] ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, it may be possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including the notice icons other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be Also, the first combination may be a combination that necessarily includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination not including at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of the pre-reading shown in FIG. 41 (1)] is suspended, the second In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (19), the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is suspended The notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "print" displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are digested in the period from when the symbol variation display ends to the end
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested by a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished. Because a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect may be improved.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be ones that are digested other than the plurality of advance notice icons. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the second A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when the symbol variation display of is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the second symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested in one pattern variation display, the first effect display is not displayed [eg, Even if only one of the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "print" is digested, the effect image shown in FIG. 42 (21) is not displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the first effect display is not displayed unless the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is not digested in one pattern change display, so the first effect display It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can see the

  Here, even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested in one pattern variation display, only the first effect display may not be displayed, or one time In the symbol variation display of, even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested, a display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. In addition, even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested in one pattern variation display, the first effect display may not necessarily be displayed, or one time In the symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested, the first effect display may be displayed.

  In addition, even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested only in one symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed, or only once. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed even if only a part of the notice icon in the first combination is digested.

In addition, “the third notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 20 and the like shown in FIG. 20] is digested as the notice icon, and the third effect display as the effect display is displayed [eg FIG. ) Is displayed so that a display effect etc. of the character BC of the group leader displayed corresponding to the consumption of the notice icon I6 of the hat, pushes up the right symbol, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, variations of the effect may be increased, and the effect may be enhanced.

  Here, only the third effect display may be displayed by digesting the third preview icon, or the third preview icon may be digested. A display other than the effect display may also be displayed. In addition, the third announcement display may be displayed without fail by the third announcement icon being digested, or the third announcement icon may be digested by the third announcement icon. The display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third effect display may be displayed only by the third notice icon being digested, and the third notice icon may be displayed other than being digested. Three effect displays may be displayed.

In addition, “the lost symbol fluctuation display which is the target of the pre-reading (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol fluctuation display [for example, the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66) The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from when the variable display etc. is suspended) to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display which is the object of prefetching is suspended until the symbol fluctuation display which is the object of prefetching is finished ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may also be started in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. Four notice icons have been digested, etc., from when a certain symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is finished.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the four symbol variation displays are suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation displays, items other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when symbol variation display of is suspended until display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the display of the number corresponding to the number for which the start of symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold") [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. The display area 281 displays the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings according to the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. The icon I22 etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operations of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
[First display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.];
A second display means [eg, a second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, a second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]
A game console equipped with
The first display means is a display related to a notice icon [eg, a display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIGS. 46 (10) to 47 (13) is digested, and FIG. 47 (16) to FIG. 49) a display of a character BC of a teamhead performed corresponding to the notice icon I6 of a hat or a pseudo-series effect, or a display of a notice icon I6 of a hat shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. 49 (c5). Etc] can be displayed,
The second display means is a display related to the notice icon [for example, shown in the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 46 (2) to FIG. 47 (13) or FIG. 46 (5) to FIG. 49 (c6), or a display capable of displaying the warning icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display [eg, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18 may function as a pre-reading notice display, etc.]
Big hit symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that will be a big hit based on the second suspension of pre-reading shown in FIG. 49 (c1)] During the period from when the second symbol variation display is ended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. 49 (c9), the notice icon display is made in a period from when the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is suspended until the symbol variation display is ended. In the area 285B, two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since a display related to the notice icon may be displayed on a plurality of display means, the line of sight of the player who sees the display regarding the notice icon is not concentrated on one display means. It may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the display means may be composed only of the first display means and the second display means, or may be provided with display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . Further, the display means may always include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the display regarding the advance notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display concerning the advance notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display the display on the advance notice icon, or may not display the display on the advance notice icon.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the display regarding the advance notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display concerning the advance notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display the display on the advance notice icon, or may not display the display on the advance notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, there may be a case where only display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started. In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended after the second symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the second suspension which is the object of pre-reading shown in FIG. 49 (c1), etc.] is suspended, the second In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. 49 (c9), it is a target of prefetching In the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the symbol variation display, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken and the notice icon I6 of the two hats are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested by a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished. Because a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect may be improved.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be ones that are digested other than the plurality of advance notice icons. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the second A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when the symbol variation display of is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the second symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, the notice icon may be displayed on “the second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.] [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (5), a hat advance icon I6 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display means by which stock effect can be performed is defined, it may be possible not to miss the stock notice icon.

  Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display other than the notice icon. Good. The second display means may be configured to always display the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, and the notice icon is also displayed on display means other than the second display means. It is also good.

In addition, that the notice icon is displayed on “the first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.] For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (2) to FIG. (5), a display for giving notice that the hat notification icon I 6 is displayed in the notification icon display area 285 A may be displayed Effects are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since it is notified that there is a possibility that the notice icon may be displayed, it may be possible to make the display means pay attention to the player and prevent the player from missing the notice icon display. is there.

  Here, in the first display means, there may be a case where only a display for giving a notice that the notice icon is displayed may be displayed, or a display for giving a notice that the notice icon is displayed on the first display means It may be possible to display other than the above. In addition, there may be a case where the first display means always displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed, or the first display means displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed. It may not be done.

  Further, there may be a case where a display for giving a notice that the notice icon is displayed may be displayed only in the first display means, and the notice icon is displayed also in the display means other than the first display means. In some cases, it may be displayed to give notice.

[The first display means is a first display area [e.g., the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.] It is a means provided
The second display means is provided with a second display area [e.g., the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.] It is a means,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [e.g., as shown in FIG. 46 (4) or FIG. [1] being displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce an effect of a notice icon with an impact, and it may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with display areas other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed across only the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the area. Also, the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area in some cases, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, only the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area, and those other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. May be displayed across the screen.

[The first display means is a first display area [e.g., the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.] It is a means provided
The second display means is provided with a second display area [e.g., the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.] It is a means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type [for example, a plurality of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 18],
When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [e.g. As shown in the figure 47 (16) to the figure (18), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the enlarged character BC2 of the displayed bancho from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device The right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B in the effect display which is displayed over the 208B and the Bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, and the pseudo run symbol is the second Displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A from the decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce an effect of a notice icon with an impact, and it may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with display areas other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  In addition, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in the display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type or may not be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type.

  In addition, when the advance notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested advance notice icon may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested may be displayed over the display areas other than the first display area and the second display area. It is also good. In addition, when the advance notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested advance notice icon may be necessarily displayed across the first display area and the second display area. When the advance notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested advance notice icon may not be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.

  In addition, when the advance notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested advance notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, any effect indication other than the effect indication corresponding to the type of the indicated notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. Good.

In addition, “the lost symbol fluctuation display which is the target of the pre-reading (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol fluctuation display [for example, the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66) The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from when the variable display etc. is suspended) to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display which is the object of prefetching is suspended until the symbol fluctuation display which is the object of prefetching is finished ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may also be started in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. Four notice icons have been digested, etc., from when a certain symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is finished.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the four symbol variation displays are suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation displays, items other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when symbol variation display of is suspended until display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the display of the number corresponding to the number for which the start of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as “the number of hold”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. The display area 281 displays the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations according to the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (hat notice icon I6 or the like shown in FIG. It is not an icon that shows the number of pending operations for symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]”
A first movable means [for example, an actuator for displacing the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 52 (12), a family crest 224B etc. shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)];
A game console equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display may be a notice icon [eg, notice icons shown in FIG. 18 (a) and FIG. 18 (b), notice icon I21 of "house", notice icon I22 of "print". , Drink notice icon I31 etc],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
Big hit symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that will be a big hit based on the third suspension of pre-reading shown in FIG. 19 (2)] During the period from when the second symbol variation display is ended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. 23 (66) and FIG. 52, in a period from when the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is suspended to the end of the symbol variation display, The notice icon display area 285 displays two notice icons I6 for hats, a notice icon I9 for one thousand boxes, an notice icon I31 for drinks, etc.],
The first movable means performs the first movable effect [for example, the movable effect for displacing the effect button 136 from the default position to the protruding position as shown in FIG. 52 (12) to FIG. (17)]. A viable means,
The first movable effect may be executed when a fourth notice icon [for example, a drink notice icon I31, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested. ,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the movable means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the movable means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, when the fourth notice icon is digested in the display means, the first movable effect by the first movable means may be performed, so that variations of effects can be increased. There is a case.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it may be possible to focus attention on the movable means without concentrating the line of sight of the player only on the display means, and it may be possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may display the notice icon without fail or may not display the notice icon.

  In addition, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in the display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type or may not be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a pre-reading notice display, or may be other than being displayed as a pre-reading notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, there may be a case where only display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started. In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended after the second symbol variation display is suspended.

  In addition, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the first movable effect. Further, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  In addition, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon When the fourth notice icon among them is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may also be executed. In addition, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be necessarily executed, or the displayed notice icon It may be configured such that the first movable effect may not be performed when the fourth notice icon among them is digested.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. The first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon among them is digested.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the third suspension which is the target of the pre-reading shown in FIG. 19 (2)] is suspended, the second In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is ended, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. 23 (66) or FIG. In the period from when the target symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the symbol variation display, the notice icons I6 for two hats, the notification icons I9 for one and a half boxes, the notification icon I31 for a drink, etc. ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested by a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished. Because a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect may be improved.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be ones that are digested other than the plurality of advance notice icons. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the second A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when the symbol variation display of is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the second symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, when the fifth notice icon [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18 or the notice icon I21 of "house" among the displayed notice icons is digested], the first movable Configured so that no rendition is performed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or one of the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is digested, the movable effect other than the first movable effect may not be executed. In addition, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may not necessarily be executed, or the first of the displayed notice icons may be selected. The first movable effect may be executed when the five advance notice icons are digested.

  In addition, the first movable effect may not be executed only when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the first of the displayed notice icons may be selected. The first movable effect may not be executed even when the five advance notice icons are not digested.

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136 and the like] is provided,
The first movable means is means for moving the operation means,
The first movable effect refers to the mode of the operation means from the first mode [for example, the default position shown in FIG. 52 (12), etc.] to the second mode [for example, FIG. 52 (17) Is the effect of changing to the
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the change of the operation means may be notified by the notice icon in some cases, the operation means may also be noticed.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by persons other than the player. Also, it may be operated by the player without fail, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the first movable means may be capable of moving only the operating means, or may be movable other than the operating means. Further, the first movable means may move the operating means without fail or may not move the operating means.

In addition, “a second movable means [for example, a family crest or the like shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)]” is provided,
The second movable means is means capable of executing a second movable effect [for example, a family pattern falling effect etc. shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)],
The second movable effect may be executed when a sixth notice icon [for example, a notice icon I21 of "house", etc.] among the displayed notice icons is digested. ing,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the variety of effects by the movable means may be rich, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the second movable effect. In addition, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

  In addition, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. In the case where the sixth notice icon of the above is digested, movable effects other than the second movable effect may also be executed. In addition, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be performed without fail. Of the displayed notice icons The second movable effect may not be executed when the sixth preview icon is digested.

  In addition, the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. The second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon of the above is digested.

In addition, “the lost symbol fluctuation display which is the target of the pre-reading (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol fluctuation display [for example, the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66) The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from when the variable display etc. is suspended) to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display which is the object of prefetching is suspended until the symbol fluctuation display which is the object of prefetching is finished ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may also be started in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. Four notice icons have been digested, etc., from when a certain symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is finished.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the four symbol variation displays are suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation displays, items other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when symbol variation display of is suspended until display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the display of the number corresponding to the number for which the start of symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold") [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. The display area 281 displays the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

“The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the number displayed. For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 52 (eg, a notice icon I9 of a box and a notice icon I31 of a drink) Is not an icon indicating the number of pending operations of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [eg, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
Big hit symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that will be a big hit based on the second suspension of pre-reading shown in FIG. 54 (1)] During the period from when the second symbol variation display is ended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as There is a case [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. 23 (66), in the period from when the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is suspended to the end of the symbol variation display, In the area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a box of notice icons I9 and a notice icon I10 of a fan are displayed, etc.]
One of the plural types of displays may be a notice icon display suggestion display [eg, a notice that a notice icon by a hall effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 54 (2) to FIG. (6) ],
The preview icon display suggestion display is a display that suggests that the display of the preview icon may be started.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  Moreover, according to this game console, it may be suggested in advance that there may be a possibility that the display of the advance notice icon may be started, so there may be cases where the process until the notice icon is displayed can be enjoyed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may display the notice icon without fail or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon display indication display, or may not display the notice icon display indication display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a pre-reading notice display, or may be other than being displayed as a pre-reading notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, there may be a case where only display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started. In addition, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be started only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended after the second symbol variation display is suspended.

  In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may suggest only that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may be other than the display of the notice icon may be started. It may be suggested. Moreover, the notice icon display suggestion display may always indicate that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may not indicate that the display of the notice icon may be started. It may be.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of the pre-reading shown in FIG. 54 (1)] is suspended, the second In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. In a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the symbol variation display, the notice icons I6 of two hats, the notice icons I9 of the two-storied box and the notice icons of the fan are digested in the notice icon display area 285 Being done etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested by a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished. Because a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect may be improved.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be ones that are digested other than the plurality of advance notice icons. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the second A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when the symbol variation display of is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the second symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (2) to FIG. The notice that the notice icon by the hall effect is displayed over the symbol variation display of, etc. is performed],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display, it may be possible to enjoy the process until the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of times of symbol fluctuation display, or displayed over a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays other than the symbol fluctuation display. May be In addition, the advance notice icon display suggestion display may be necessarily displayed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display, or may not be displayed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display.

In addition, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display is configured to be ended [for example, FIG. 54 (2) ~ As shown in (5) of the figure, the notice that the notice icon by the hall effect is displayed is finished before the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the advance notice icon display suggestion display ends before the symbol change display to be read out is started, it may be possible to concentrate on the symbol change to be read out.

  Here, during the display of the symbol fluctuation display displayed before the second symbol fluctuation display, only the display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol fluctuation may be displayed. The display other than the display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display may also be finished while the symbol variation display displayed before the display is displayed. In addition, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display may always be ended, or the second symbol variation display The display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display may not be ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before that.

  In addition, the display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display may be ended only during the display of the symbol fluctuation display displayed before the second symbol fluctuation display, or the second symbol fluctuation display The display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated even during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the display.

In addition, the “prediction icon display indication display” is a display that may indicate that the display of at least one of the third number [for example, three etc.] of the above-mentioned advance notice icons may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-4), in the Amida effect, display of at least one of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I10 of the fan, and the notice icon I9 of the two-sided box may be started. It suggests that there is something, etc.],
The third number is a number of 2 or more,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, at least one of the notice icons suggested in advance may be displayed, so that the player can grasp which notice icon may be displayed. And there may be cases where it is possible to enjoy the symbol variation in which the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the preview icon display suggestion display may only indicate that the display of at least one of the third number of preview icons may be started, or the third icon It may also indicate that something other than the display of at least one of the number of advance notice icons may be started. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may always indicate that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third number notice icons There may be cases where it does not indicate that at least one of the displays may be started.

In addition, “at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested to be displayed may be started by the notice icon indication suggestion display may be started [eg, as shown in FIG. As shown in 56 (a1-1) to (a-6), as a result of the Amida effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, there may be a case where only at least one of the third number of preview icons suggested to be displayed may be started by the preview icon display suggestion display. A display other than the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may also be started. In addition, at least one of the third number of notice icons that is suggested to be indicated by the notice icon indication suggestion display may be configured to be always started, or the notice may be made. In some cases, display of at least one of the third number of preview icons suggested to be started by the icon display suggestion display may not be started.

In addition, “the lost symbol fluctuation display which is the target of the pre-reading (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol fluctuation display [for example, the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66) The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from when the variable display etc. is suspended) to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display which is the object of prefetching is suspended until the symbol fluctuation display which is the object of prefetching is finished ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may also be started in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons may be necessarily started. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. Four notice icons have been digested, etc., from when a certain symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is finished.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the four symbol variation displays are suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation displays, items other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when symbol variation display of is suspended until display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the display of the number corresponding to the number for which the start of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as “the number of hold”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. The display area 281 displays the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations according to the displayed number. It is not an icon that shows the number of pending operations for symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [eg, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a first preview notice,
Big hit symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that will be a big hit based on the third suspension of pre-reading shown in FIG. 57 (2)] After being suspended, symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “display of first symbol fluctuation display [eg symbol fluctuation display etc. shown in FIG. 57 (4) to FIG. (13)].”) May be started,
In a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") The display may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (4) to FIG. 23 (66), the symbol fluctuation display started after the symbol fluctuation display to be the target of pre-reading becoming the jackpot is suspended Of two hats, a notice icon I9 of a box, and a notice icon I10 of a fan are displayed from when the display of the symbol display is started to when the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading is finished etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which the display is started next to the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, while it is possible to enjoy the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display relating to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed, it is started thereafter In some cases, it may be possible to enjoy the display of the notice icon as a prefetch notice display related to the second symbol change display to be pre-read from the symbol change display to be performed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may display the notice icon without fail or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first pre-reading notice display, or may be other than being displayed as the first pre-reading notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as the first pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as the first pre-reading notice display.

  Also, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol fluctuation display is started after the second symbol fluctuation display is suspended, or the first symbol fluctuation after the second symbol fluctuation display is suspended The symbol variation display other than the display of the display may also be started. In addition, the display of the first symbol variation display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the first symbol variation display after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the second symbol is displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. Only the display of one symbol variation display may be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In a period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may also be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, in the period from when the display of the first symbol variation display is started to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [eg, As shown in FIG. 19 (4) to FIG. 23 (66), the target of the prefetching is started after the display of the symbol fluctuating display started after the symbol fluctuation display to be the jackpot of the prefetching is suspended Before the end of the symbol variation display which is a big hit, the notice icons I6 of the two hats, the notice icons I9 of the two-tiered box, the notice icon I10 of the fan, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, while it is possible to enjoy the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display relating to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed, it is started thereafter In some cases, it is possible to enjoy digestion of the notice icon as a prefetch notice display related to the second symbol change display to be subjected to prefetching from the symbol change display.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the first symbol variation display is started to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends. In a period from the start of display of one symbol variation display to the end of display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where items other than a plurality of notice icons are also digested. In addition, during the period from when the first symbol variation display is started to when the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily digested, or the first symbol variation display A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when the display of the symbol display is started to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only in a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the second symbol variation display is ended after display of the symbol variation display is started.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the display of the number corresponding to the number for which the start of symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold") The display area 281 displays the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations according to the number displayed [for example, the notice icon (hat notice icon I6 or the like shown in FIG. It is not an icon that shows the number of pending operations for symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, when “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the third suspension which is the target of the pre-reading shown in FIG. The display of the hold display [for example, the display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 57 (2), etc.] is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, it may be possible to recognize that the second symbol variation display has been suspended.

  Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol change display is held, and also in the case other than when the second symbol change display is held. The display of the hold display may be started. Moreover, when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the display of the second suspension display may always be started, or when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the display of the second suspension display is It does not have to be started.

In addition, “the second hold display is displayed as a second pre-read advance notice display in a second pre-read display mode [for example, a display mode (presence view of a pre-read advance notice shown in FIG. May be
In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second pre-read display mode [eg, FIG. As shown in), when the symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading is held, the third hold icon h13 in the display mode (the display mode of Sabohani) Display etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the variation of the pre-reading advance notice display may increase and the interest may improve.

  Here, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second read display mode as the second read preview, and the second hold display may be displayed as the second read preview. A display mode other than the second pre-reading display mode may be displayed. In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may always be displayed in the second prefetch display mode, or as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be the second prefetch display It may not be displayed in an aspect.

  Moreover, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display mode, or the second In the symbol variation display being displayed when the symbol variation display of is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. Moreover, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may always be displayed in the second pre-reading display mode, or the second symbol variation display The second hold display may not be displayed in the second read-ahead display mode in the symbol variation display being displayed when the second hold is held.

  In addition, the second hold display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode only in the symbol change display displayed when the second symbol change display is held, or the second In the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display being displayed when the symbol variation display of is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third pre-reading advance notice display [for example, effect display or the like in pre-reading mode shown in FIG. 58 (b2) to FIG. 58 (b3)],
The third pre-read advance notice display is a display that may start to be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended [eg, as shown in FIG. 58 (b1) to FIG. (B3) As such, the effect display of the prefetch mode is started, etc., after the symbol variation display that becomes the big hit based on the third suspension being the target of prefetching is suspended, etc.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, the number of variations of the pre-reading advance notice display increases, so the interest may be improved.

  Here, the third prefetch notice may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. Other than the above, display may be started. In addition, the third pre-reading advance notice display may be always started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or is not started after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be cases.

In addition, “the lost symbol fluctuation display which is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter,“ the fourth symbol fluctuation display [for example, the symbol fluctuation which becomes the loss based on the third hold which is the target of the pre-reading shown in FIG. Symbol variation indication (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation indication [eg, symbol variation indication etc. shown in FIG. 57 (4) to FIG. The display of) may start.
In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started [e.g. As shown in 19 (4) to FIG. 23 (66), after the display of the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is suspended is started, after the display of the symbol variation display is started Until the end of the symbol variation display which is a loss, a notice icon I6 of two hats, a notice icon I9 of a box of two, and a notice icon I10 of a fan are displayed, etc.]
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which the display is started next to the symbol variation display displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variation display is started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation after the fourth symbol fluctuation display is suspended. The symbol variation display other than the display of the display may also be started. In addition, the display of the third symbol variation display may always start after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the third symbol variation display after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the fourth symbol spread display is not performed after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. Only the display of three symbol variation displays may be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or In the period from the start of the display of the three symbol variation displays to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display other than the display of the plurality of advance notice icons may also be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may not be started in a period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started also in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the three symbol variation displays to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. Four notice icons have been digested, etc., from when a certain symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is finished.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy until the symbol variation display to be read out is finished.

  Here, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or In a period from when the four symbol variation displays are suspended to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation displays, items other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are necessarily digested, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may not be digested in a period from when symbol variation display of is suspended until display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are digested only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, or the fourth A plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than a period until display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended after symbol variation display of is suspended.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying notice icons [eg, notice icons shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), notice icons shown in FIG. 72 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon [eg, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the first display [eg, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69],
The first display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of "at notice icon digestion ... displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 62 (a) It is a display of “Tomon-sama is general Yatsushiro” displayed in section TT1, “Panda is a master of the temple”, etc. displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed on a first display area [for example, a tutorial display unit TT4 or the like shown in FIG. 69] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the tutorial display section TT4 displays a notice icon I62 for swordsmen. And notice icon I63 of chance up is displayed (stock) etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may display the notice icon without fail or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a pre-reading notice display, or may be other than being displayed as a pre-reading notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be displayable only in the first display area of the display means, or may be displayable in display areas other than the first display area in the display means, It is also good. Further, the first display may be necessarily displayed in the first display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means.

  Also, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be one. In addition, the advance notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area when displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. .

Also, in the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed. The explanation display is not performed in the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed, or may not be displayed in any state other than the state where the advance notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed.

In addition, “when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed. [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. Resume the explanation display when all the notice icons are digested, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed, or when the notice icon is digested, the displays other than the display of the first display are also resumed. There may be. In addition, when the advance notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may always be resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [eg, character display of“ superheat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (d), etc.]”
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Character display is displayed, etc.],
The instruction display is an instruction display regarding the notice icon [for example, the letter display of "at notice icon digest ... in the notice display TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), etc.]"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or in the display areas other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be displayable. Also, the second display may be necessarily displayed in the first display area when displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. It is also good.

  In addition, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, and may also include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the instruction display may include the instruction display on the notice icon or may not include the instruction display on the notice icon.

"The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [eg, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 66],
The third display means is a display according to the display of the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from a treasure box image TR shown in FIG. 66 (a2) to FIG. It is a means capable of displaying a display etc. where the icon I 62 is stocked,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means [e.g., as shown in FIG. 66 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration It is arranged under the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display means. You may be comprised including display means other than a display means. In addition, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display It may be configured without including at least one of the means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may display symbol fluctuation display without fail or may not display symbol fluctuation display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display or may not display the effect display.

  In addition, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display in accordance with the display of the second display means, and may also display a display other than the display in accordance with the display of the second display means It may be In addition, the third display means may always display the display in accordance with the display of the second display means, or the display in accordance with the display of the second display means may not be displayed. It is also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a partial area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  Also, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or provided in an area other than at least a part of the area in the third display means. It may be In addition, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a partial area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a partial area of the third display means. It may be.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [eg, character display displayed on stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 69, etc.]”
The third display is an explanatory display [for example, the display of “jojomachi stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 63 (c) Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.],
The third display is a display displayed on a second display area [for example, stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), etc.] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the stage name display unit ST2 displays a notice icon I64 for a princess and Two pseudo linked notice icons I 65 are displayed (stock), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayable in display areas other than the second display area in the display means. May be Further, the third display may be necessarily displayed in the second display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area of the display means.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. In addition, the advance notice icon may be displayed in the second display area without fail or may not be displayed in the second display area.

Also, while the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. In the state in which the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the third display may be only the state in which the advance notice icon is displayed in the second display area and not displayed, or the state other than the state in which the advance notice icon is displayed in the second display area Or may not be displayed. Further, the third display may not necessarily be displayed in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, and is displayed in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area It may be done.

[The first display area is a display area divided by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is divided into a square by a line, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including something other than a line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily divided by a line, or may not be divided.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the display of the number corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold") [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations according to the displayed number [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 69 (a7) (the notice icon I64 for the princess, the icon I65 for pseudo-series notice, Notice icon I62 of swordsman, notice icon I63 of chance up, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operations of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying notice icons [eg, notice icons shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), notice icons shown in FIG. 72 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
The display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69, the stage name display section ST2 etc. shown in FIG. 69] is displayed in the hold icon [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. A display area different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area etc. shown in FIG. 69] in which the hold icon h11, h12, h13 etc. is displayed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the first display [eg, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69],
The first display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of "at notice icon digestion ... displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 62 (a) It is a display of “Tomon-sama is general Yatsushiro” displayed in section TT1, “Panda is a master of the temple”, etc. displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display, when displayed, is a display displayed on the first display area in the display means [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [e.g., as shown in FIG. Notice icon I63 is displayed (stock) etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may display the notice icon without fail or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a pre-reading notice display, or may be other than being displayed as a pre-reading notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display or may not be displayed as a pre-reading notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or other than the first display area in the display means when it is displayed It may be displayed also in the display area of. Further, the first display may be necessarily displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area. In addition, the advance notice icon may be displayed in the first display area without fail or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Also, when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. In the displayed state, the explanation display is not performed in the tutorial display unit TT4, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the state where it is displayed in the first display area of the notice icon, only the first display may not be displayed, and in the state where it is displayed in the first display area of the notice icon, the first The display other than the display of may not be displayed. Further, in the state where the first display area is displayed in the first notice icon area, the first display may not necessarily be displayed, and in the state where it is displayed in the first display area of the notice icon, the first The display may be displayed.

  In addition, the first display may not be displayed only in the state where it is displayed in the first display area of the advance notice icon, or in a state other than the state where it is displayed in the first display area of the notice icon. Only the first display may not be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. Restart the explanation display when all the notice icons are consumed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed, or when the notice icon is digested, the displays other than the display of the first display are also resumed. May be In addition, when the advance notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may always be resumed, or when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

  Further, in the case where the first display is, for example, the explanation of the first character, a tenth display which is an explanatory display different from the first display may be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [eg, character display of“ superheat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (d), etc.]”
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Character display is displayed, etc.],
The instruction display is an instruction display regarding the notice icon [for example, the letter display of "at notice icon digest ... in the notice display TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), etc.]"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or in the display areas other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be displayable. Also, the second display may be necessarily displayed in the first display area when displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. It is also good.

  In addition, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, and may also include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the instruction display may include the instruction display on the notice icon or may not include the instruction display on the notice icon.

  The notice display in this description may be one of a number of notice displays.

  In addition, the advance notice may be a advance notice by display of characters. On the other hand, the other preliminary display may be display by display of an image.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, the character display of“ gold is hotter than red ”in the blowout portion TT2 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), FIG. (A6), for example, the character display of “Swordsman reach is hot” in the blowout part TT2 and the character display of “If the panda is intruding” in the blowout part TT3, etc.]
The third display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display is a display that is displayed in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed [for example, the blowout part TT2 or the blowout part TT3 shown in FIG. 68 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be entirely different.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed other than the second display area in the display means. It may be displayed also in the display area of. In addition, the third display may be necessarily displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the second display area of the display means. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

Also, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 68 (a10), Even if the warning notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, the character display of "Kengo reach is hot" is displayed on the balloon display section TT2, and the "Pander intrudes" on the balloon display section TT3. Character display is displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even if the display is in the off state, displays other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed without fail, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, and the state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area Even in the state of, the third display may be displayed.

  Further, the introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  In addition, there may be a case where a notice display (second notice display) different from the first notice display is performed in the second display area. In addition, the advance notice display and the explanation display may be displayed alternatively.

Further, “one of the plurality of types of display is the fourth display [eg, character display displayed on stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 69, etc.]”
The fourth display is an explanatory display [for example, the display of “jojomachi stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 63 (c) Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.],
The display content of the fourth display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display is a display displayed on a third display area [for example, stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1) and the like] in the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
When the first number [for example, three etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, in the state where three preview icons are displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69, a new preview icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be entirely different.

  Further, the fourth display may be displayable only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayable in display areas other than the third display area in the display means. It is also good. Further, the fourth display may be necessarily displayed in the third display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area of the display means.

  In addition, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

  Further, in a state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area, or the first notice icon may be displayed. In the state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. In addition, in a state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area without fail. In the state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

  Also, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, or the first number Even in a state other than the state in which the previous notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

  Further, here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed by a plurality of display means is also included.

Also, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), a notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2 In the state in which the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth display may be only the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area and not displayed, or the state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area Or may not be displayed. In addition, the fourth display may not necessarily be displayed in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or displayed in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed in the third display area It may be done.

"The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [eg, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 66],
The third display means is a display linked with the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from a treasure box image TR shown in FIG. 66 (a2) to FIG. Is a means capable of displaying a display etc.
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means [e.g., as shown in FIG. 66 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration It is arranged under the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display means. You may be comprised including display means other than a display means. In addition, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display It may be configured without including at least one of the means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may display symbol fluctuation display without fail or may not display symbol fluctuation display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display linked to the display of the second display means, or may also display a display other than the display linked to the display of the second display means It may be In addition, the third display means may always display a display linked to the display of the second display means, or there may be a case where the display linked to the display of the second display means is not displayed. It is also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a partial area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  Also, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or provided in an area other than at least a part of the area in the third display means. It may be In addition, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a partial area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a partial area of the third display means. It may be.

[The first display area is a display area divided by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is divided into a square by a line, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including something other than a line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily divided by a line, or may not be divided.

  In addition, the second display area may be partitioned by a line, and the third display area may also be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]”,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the display of the number corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold") [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations according to the displayed number [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 69 (a9) (hime notice icon I64, pseudo linked notice icon I65, Notice icon I62 of swordsman, notice icon I63 of chance up, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operations of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  In addition, the number of pending numbers and the number of notice icons may happen to coincide with each other.

  In addition, the maximum number of holdings and the maximum number of stocking notice icons may be the same or different.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far.

(Supplementary Note 1)
An image display means,
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
Means of notification that can execute multiple types of notifications,
A game console equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notice icons.
The said hold display is a display displayed on the hold display area in the said image display means,
The said pending | holding display is a display according to the number (henceforth "the pending | holding number") by which the action | operation of the said symbol fluctuation display is suspended,
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display unit,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more notice icons.
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested.
The first preview icon among the plurality of types of preview icons is larger than the first number during the period during which one of the symbol variation display is being executed. It is configured to be more likely to be a big hit if two numbers are digested.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note 1 or 2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing false notice in the same manner as the notice mode,
The notice means is means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false announcement is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be disjointed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
A fourth number, wherein the number of preview icons to be displayed in the preview icon display area is larger than the third number during the period in which the one symbol variation display is executed. Is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
A hold display unit capable of executing display according to the number of holdings;
The hold display unit is a display unit different from the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 6)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 5,
The hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
Equipped with a pre-reading notice that can carry out pre-reading notice,
The pre-reading advance notice means is a means capable of executing the pre-reading advance notice by displaying the pre-notification icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 8)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 7,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") to be pre-read is executed, the notice icon may be digested a fifth number,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) to be executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth The number may be digested,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol change display is being held in a period during which the first symbol change display is being performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed, the notice icon may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 10)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 9,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) to be executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the fourth symbol variation is performed The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the display period.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10, wherein
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying the hold display up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by

(Supplementary Note 12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
It has a production means that can execute multiple types of effects,
One of the multiple types of announcements is the first announcement,
One of the multiple types of announcements is a second announcement,
The first notice is a different notice from the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect is performed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect is to be performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 15)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the display types is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display, the display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display,
In the symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol fluctuation display") displayed after the first symbol fluctuation display, the first symbol not displayed during the display of the first symbol fluctuation display The notice icon of is configured to be digestible,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 16)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 15,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 17)
It is a game console described in Appendix 15 or 16,
The first notice icon may be started to be displayed during display of the first symbol variation display as pre-reading notification of the second symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
During the display of one symbol variation display, the jackpot is larger when the second number of the first preview icons are digested than when the first number of the first preview icons are digested. Easily
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 19)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 18,
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit with the symbol variation display digested.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 19,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice may be displayed as the notice.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 21)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 20,
One of the display types is a fake notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first false notice may be displayed as the false notice.
The display mode of the first false preview display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first preview display,
In the symbol variation display where the first false notice display is displayed, it is configured to be a gap,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 22)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 21,
One of the plurality of types of display is pre-reading effect display,
A third notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, the pre-reading effect display may be started.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 23)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 22,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 24)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 23,
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 24,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 26)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 25,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the display unit,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 27)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 26,
Equipped with presentation control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 28)
It is a game console described in Appendix 27,
Main control means,
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 28,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 30)
First display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
Second display means,
A game console equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notices.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number (hereinafter referred to as the "number of reservations") in which the operation of the symbol variation display is suspended,
The symbol variation display is a display that is started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display unit,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested;
During a period in which one of the symbol variation display is being executed, the second number digest which is larger than the first number is a big hit when the notice icon is greater than the first number. It is configured to be easy to
The second display means is provided in the notice icon display area as a preview notice, prior to the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) which is the target of the prefetching. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon;
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 31)
It is a game stand described in appendix 30,
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 32)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 30 or 31,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode,
The second display means can display the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a good display means,
After the false advance notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be uncovered.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 33)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is a display means configured of a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 34)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 33,
One display unit of the plurality of display units is an image display unit,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a hold display means,
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the hold number on the hold display area,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon on the notice icon display area,
The hold display unit is a display unit different from the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 35)
It is a game console described in Appendix 34,
The hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 36)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is an image display means.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the hold number.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 37)
30. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 36, wherein
The notice icon may be digested a fifth number during the period when the second symbol variation display is being executed,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) to be executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth The number may be digested,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for informing that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during a period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 38)
30. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 36, wherein
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be read.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 39)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 38, wherein
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed, the notice icon may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 40)
It is a game console described in Appendix 39,
The notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed in the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed that is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed May be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 41)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 40, wherein
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display according to the hold number up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 42)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 41, wherein
It has a production means that can execute multiple types of effects,
As the notice icon, a first notice icon can be displayed,
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a first preview display,
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a second preview display,
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is displayed.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first preliminary display is a preliminary display for notifying that the first effect is performed,
The second preliminary display is a preliminary display for notifying that the second effect is to be performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 43)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 42, wherein
Main control means,
Effect control means,
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 44)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 43, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 45)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the process ends, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "several notice icons") may be digested,
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. It may be displayed,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed.
One of the plurality of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One of the notice icons among the plurality of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first effect display is displayed as the effect display by digesting the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as the "first number of notice icons") in one pattern variation display. Are configured to
The first number of notice icons are notice icons including the first notice icon,
The first number of notice icons are notice icons including the second notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by display.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the first effect display may be displayed until one of the first number of icons is displayed and the first number of icons is consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have a sense of expectation for something.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for a big hit by making the number of notice icons appear as a symbol change prior to the suspension to be read ahead.

  Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or three or more notice icons.

  Further, when the first notice icon is digested, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, or when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon may be displayed. A corresponding effect display B may be performed, or a effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested. You may

  Also, only one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, or only one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be newly added. It may be displayed on the screen.

(Appendix 46)
It is a game console described in Appendix 45,
The first effect display is configured not to be displayed even if a second number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "the second number of notice icons") are digested in one pattern variation display. Yes,
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons including the notice icon of one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons not including the other notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon is displayed, and a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon in one symbol change display. Since the first effect display is not displayed if b is not digested, it may be possible to give a player a sense of superiority to the player who could see the first effect display.

  Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

  The first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Also, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

  In addition, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of advance notice icons are digested.

  Moreover, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or all of the first effect display may be displayed.

  In addition, the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of the preview icons that have been digested, or the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be the same.

  In addition, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be always digested.

  In addition, even when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested, and the second number of notice icons are digested. Alternatively, both the first notice icon and the second notice icon may not be deleted.

(Supplementary Note 47)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Notes 45 or 46,
One of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon,
By digesting the third notice icon, a third effect display is displayed as the effect display,
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect and enhance the effect.

  The third notice icon may be one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  Also, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix 48)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 45 to 47,
In the case where the lost symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth symbol fluctuation display") which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, the fourth symbol fluctuation display is started after the third symbol fluctuation display is started. The plurality of notice icons may be digested before termination.
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game console, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy it until the change of the pending for pre-reading is over.

  In addition, it is digested from the first symbol fluctuation display or the third symbol fluctuation display to the symbol fluctuation display of the object of prefetching in the case where the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the object of prefetching is a big hit and it is a loss The maximum number of preview icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, it is digested from the first symbol fluctuation display or the third symbol fluctuation display to the symbol fluctuation display of the object of prefetching when the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the object of prefetching is a big hit and it is a loss The minimum number of preview icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, one pattern which is performed before the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol fluctuation display) The maximum number of notice icons to be digested in the fluctuation display (for example, the first symbol fluctuation display, the third symbol fluctuation display) is when the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the target of the pre-reading is a big hit or when it is lost It may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, one pattern which is performed before the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol fluctuation display) The minimum number of notice icons to be digested in the fluctuation display (for example, the first symbol fluctuation display, the third symbol fluctuation display) is when the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the target of pre-reading is a big hit or when it is lost It may be the same or different.

  In addition, the maximum number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) to be prefetched in the state in which the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended The same may or may not be the case where the result of the symbol variation display of the object of pre-reading is a big hit and the case where it is lost.

  In addition, the minimum number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) to be prefetched in the state in which the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended The same may or may not be the case where the result of the symbol variation display of the object of pre-reading is a big hit and the case where it is lost.

(Supplementary Note 49)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 48,
When the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of advance notice icons are displayed from the start of the third symbol variation display to the end of the fourth symbol variation display There is a case,
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a lower jackpot, so it may be possible to enjoy it until the change of the reserve to be read ahead is over.

(Appendix 50)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 45 to 49,
Equipped with a hold display means,
The suspension display means is a means capable of displaying the number of suspension displays corresponding to the number of times the start of symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter referred to as “the number of suspension”).
A game stand characterized by

  The hold display unit may be an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting unit such as an LED, or a movable unit.

(Appendix 51)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 50,
It is configured not to display the number of holdings according to the number at which the notice icon is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

(Appendix 52)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes 45 to 51,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 53)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes 45 to 51,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 54)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays;
The display of one of a plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to a notice icon,
The display of one of a plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a preview notice.
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the process ends, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "several notice icons") may be digested,
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or the light guide plate may be lens cut and the pattern may appear by irradiating it from the side with a light source. , And may be configured by light emitting means such as an LED, or may be configured by 7 segments.

  In addition, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to stocking of the notice icon, may be a display related to digesting the notice icon, or notice of stock of the notice icon It may be a display, or may be an effect display that is executed when the advance notice icon is digested.

  Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, or the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix 55)
It is a game console described in Appendix 54,
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  Note that one preview icon may be displayed anew.

  In addition, an effect that the notice icon is digested may be performed by the second display means.

(Appendix 56)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 54 or 55,
In the first display means, there may be a display indicating that the preview icon may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  It should be noted that "a display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed" may be performed in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. May be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix 57)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 54 to 56, wherein
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 58)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 54 to 56, wherein
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
An effect display corresponding to the advance notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 59)
Display means,
Movable means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the process ends, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "several notice icons") may be digested,
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. It may be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter, referred to as "notice icon digest effect") is performed,
There may be a case where an effect by the movable means (hereinafter referred to as "first movable means effect") is performed as the advance notice icon digestion effect.
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, although the effect by the movable means may be performed only for the first movable means effect, the movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may be performed. In this case, the corresponding notice icons may be displayed for each of the movable means effects, or the notice icons corresponding to the movable means for which the effects are performed may be displayed.

(Appendix 60)
It is a game console described in Appendix 59,
When the twenty-first notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed.
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, even if the twenty-first notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may not be performed, or when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, the first movable means must be taken. Means presentation may be performed.

  In addition, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, there may be a case where an effect different from the first moving means effect (effect different in operation) may be performed.

  In addition, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, effects may be performed by movable means different from the first movable means, and the twenty-first notice icon is digested. And, the effect by the first movable means may always be performed.

(Supplementary Note 61)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Notes 59 or 60,
When the second notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed, and when the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) May be performed.

(Supplementary Note 62)
It is a game stand according to any one of Appendices 59 to 61,
Equipped with operating means,
The movable means is the operation means,
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the mode of the operation means changes from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, "change" has a meaning including deformation, displacement, movement, and movement.

(Supplementary Note 63)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 59 to 62, wherein
A second movable means,
The movable means is a first movable means,
An effect by the second movable means (hereinafter referred to as "second movable means effect") may be performed as the advance notice icon consumption effect,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 64)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the process ends, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "several notice icons") may be digested,
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. It may be displayed,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a warning icon increase indication display,
The notice icon increase indication display is a indication indicating that the notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon increase indication display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

  It should be noted that even when the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may not be displayed, or when the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may be always displayed.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed by only one symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed by only one symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed.

(Appendix 65)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note 64,
In the symbol variation display performed prior to the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, the change which the display of a prior art icon increase suggestion display complete | finish may be a 2nd symbol change display. In this way, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix 66)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Notes 64 or 65,
The one of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase indication may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display that suggests that the notice icon is increased by one.

  Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon increase suggestion display may not be increased.

  Further, the notice icon increase indication display may be a notice of a case where the notice icon does not increase.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display that suggests that a plurality of notice icons are increased. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two may be increased.

  Also, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Supplementary Note 67)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Notes 64 or 65,
A twelfth number of the notice icons among the eleventh number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase indication may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 68)
Display means,
Holding display means,
A game console equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of the hold,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case where the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "second hold display") of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol change display") to be pre-read is displayed, the first Between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") may be digested,
When the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed from the start of the first symbol change display to the end of the second symbol change display. May be
The first symbol variation display is the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 69)
It is a game console described in Appendix 68,
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a prefetch display mode,
In the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 70)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 68 or 69,
In the case where the hold display (hereinafter referred to as the “fourth hold display”) of the lost symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as the “fourth symbol change display”) to be pre-read is displayed, the third The plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 71)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The second display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed,
The second display is a display displayed in a second display area when displayed.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display.

  Further, the second display may be a display showing a current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of an effect mode name of a selectable effect mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the change frequency of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and a generation frequency of one-shot notification effect change There is a mode to make it

  In addition, the display position of the preview icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearing animation performed when the preview icon is displayed, or the preview of the display position of the intermediate animation may be displayed. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area.

  In addition, here, "the notice icon" may be only one notice icon or may be only a part of notice icons among a plurality of notice icons, or all of a plurality of notice icons. It may be a notice icon of. Also, the "notice icon" may be only the notice icon displayed first of the notice icons, or a part of the notice icons including the notice icon displayed first. It may be an icon.

  Also, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely coincide, or even if a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

  In addition, a notice icon may be displayed in the display period of the first display, or may not be displayed. Also, the notice icon may be displayed in the display period of the second display, or may not be displayed.

  Also, the second display and the advance notice icon do not necessarily have to be displayed simultaneously.

  In addition, the frequency at which the display is performed may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, when the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, gaze guidance of the notice icon May be easier. Further, the sizes may be different between the first display area and the second display area, or the roles may be different between the first display area and the second display area. For example, although advance notice display is not performed in the first display area, notice display may also be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix 72)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 71,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 73)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 71 or 72,
The first display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The preview icon may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as "first part"),
Once the preview icon is digested, the overlap of the second display to the first portion is resolved.
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it on the second display area where the explanation about the notice icon related to the present and the subsequent symbol fluctuation display is performed rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is a loss, it may be possible to newly expect the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display is digested.

  The entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first part.

  In addition, during the period in which the variation icon is displayed, the variation icon may be capable of at least suggesting a sense of expectation for a big hit in the symbol variation display.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading advance notice display, or may be digested in a symbol variation display which is an object of pre-reading.

  Further, the notice icon may be always digested in the symbol change display which is the target of the pre-reading, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol change display which is the target of the pre-reading.

  Also, the advance notice icon may be configured to be displayable only in a single manner, or may be configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of times. Here, when displaying a plurality of notice icons, the notice icons may be able to be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or even if the upper limit number is not set, the notice icons may be displayed without limitation. Good.

(Appendix 74)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
The display of the second display may be started while the preview icon is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 75)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
The second display is not started when the preview icon is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 76)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 71 to 75, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third display is a notice display,
When the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 77)
70. A game console according to any one of appendices 71 to 76, wherein
The second display area is an area divided by lines.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 78)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 77,
"The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed", as described in appendix 71, "the notice icon" Is displayed in the second display area when it is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 79)
70. A game console according to any one of appendices 71 to 78, wherein
In the case of the symbol variation display which is a big hit, the number of the notice icons is digested more than the symbol variation display which is a loss.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 80)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an explanatory display of a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
One of the description displays of the plurality of types of description displays is a first description display,
The first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case of the big hit change, the number of the notice icon is more digested than the lost change,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 81)
It is a game console described in appendix 80,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter referred to as “first display area”) in which the first explanation display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 82)
It is a game console described in appendix 81,
When the preview icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanatory display is not displayed in the first explanatory display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 83)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 80 to 82, wherein
One of the description displays of the plurality of types of description displays is a second description display,
The second explanatory display is a display indicating the current stage of rendering,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter referred to as “second display area”) in which the second explanation display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 84)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 83,
Even when the preview icon is displayed in the second display area, the effect stage changes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 85)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 80 to 84, wherein
The display unit is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of types of preview icons”) as the preview icons,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect,
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 86)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
The first display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area of the display means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 87)
It is a game console described in Appendix 86,
The first display is not displayed when the preview icon is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 88)
It is a game console described in Appendix 87,
When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 89)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 86 to 88, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed.
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 90)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 86 to 89, wherein
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display in accordance with the display of the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 91)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 86 to 90, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third display is an explanatory display,
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area of the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 92)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 91,
The third display is not displayed in a state where the advance notice icon is displayed in the second display area,
A game stand characterized by

  In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display for explaining the character displayed on the second display means.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to an effect display in progress.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating a probability change expectation.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding the hit probability of reach.

  Also, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding the jackpot expectation of the character.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed simultaneously with the first preview display.

  The term "preliminary icon" described above is merely named for convenience, and this does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is conveniently named according to the display mode (motif), may be referred to as a notice item if the notice icon is a tool, and may be referred to as a notice character if the notice icon is a character. In some cases, if the notice icon indicates a skill, it may be referred to as a notice skill, and if the notice icon is a box, it may be referred to as a notice box; , It may be a notice medal. Further, the term "pre notice" in the notice icons is also simply named for convenience, and this does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be referred to as a charge item or a stock item to indicate that the item is to be stored.

  In the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 100 has been exemplified and described, for example, the game ball is enclosed in the main frame of the pachinko machine, and the enclosed ball is circulated in the pachinko machine main body and used The present invention can also be applied to the expression pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine may use an enclosed ball as a launch ball, and the payout of the ball may be performed by credit.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of embodiment, a modification, and an appendix described above, the component may be applied to other embodiments, a modification, and an appendix.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 120 speaker 136 effect button 208 decoration symbol display device 212 1st special view display device 214 2nd special view display device 224 production movable body 246 shielding device 281 reserved icon display area of special figure 1 285 notice icon display area 286 effect Hold lamp 300 main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 2nd sub control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 game board lamp 542 game stand lamp

Claims (9)

Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays ;
Holding display means,
A game console equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of the number corresponding to the number for which the start of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold"),
One of the display types is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the number displayed.
In the period from when the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, a plurality of the notices The display of an icon (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be started,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon display suggestion display,
The preview icon display suggestion display is a display that suggests that the display of the preview icon may be started.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
The plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The display of the advance notice icon display suggestion display is configured to end during the display of the symbol fluctuation display which is displayed before the second symbol fluctuation display.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The preview icon display indication display is a display that may indicate that the display of at least one of the third number of the preview icons may be started,
The third number is a number of 2 or more,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein
At least one of the third number of the notice icons may be started to be displayed by the notice icon indication suggestion display.
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
The plurality of notices in a period from when the lost symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol fluctuation display") which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol fluctuation display is ended. The display of the icon may start,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 7, and
The plurality of notice icons may be digested in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein
  The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by